SERVICE
MANUAL
REVISION 0
FEB. 1998
FY8-13F4-000
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This Service Manual provides basic facts and figures you will need to service the plain paper copier
NP6621 in the field.
The NP6621 is designed to enable automated copying work and may be configured with the following
accessory; for servicing information on the sorter, ADF, and control card, see their respective Service
Manuals:
1. Cassette Feeding Module-B2
2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2
3. Cassette Feeding Unit-K1
4. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1
5. Control Card IV N
6. ADF-E1
7. RDF-F1
8. Stapler Sorter-D1
9. Sorter 10-B1
10. Remote Diagnostic Device II
ThisServiceManualcontainsdescriptionsonthe1-CassetteFeedingUnit-B1andthe2-CassetteFeeding
Unit-A2.
Note:
The Cassette Feeding Unit-B2, the Cassette Feeding Unit-A2 the cassette feeding Unit K1, the Paper
Deck Pedestal-K1 and Remote Diagnostic Device II may not be available for sale in some areas.
This Service Manual is organized as follows:
CHAPTER 1, “General Introduction,” explains the NP6621’s features, specifications, and step-by-step
instructions on how to operate the copier.
CHAPTER 2, “Copying Processes,” shows how the NP6621 generates copies while discussing each of
the steps involved.
CHAPTER 3, “Operations and Timing,” explains the NP6621’s mechanical system by function and
principles behind its electrical system in relation to timing of each operation.
CHAPTER 4, “Mechanical System,” provides instructions on how to disassemble/assemble and adjust the
NP6621.
CHAPTER 5, “Installation,” provides points to note when selecting the site of installation and instructions
on how to install the NP6621.
CHAPTER 6, ‘Maintenance and Inspection,” gives tables of periodically replaced parts and consumables/
durables as well as a scheduled servicing chart.
APPENDIX contains a general timing chart, general circuit diagrams, and PCB diagrams.
This Service Manual is accompanied by the Service Handbook, which provides information on how to
maintain and inspect the NP6621 through adjustment and troubleshooting work.
Information found in this manual may be updated from time to time for product improvement, and major
updates are communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to be thoroughly familiar with this Service Manual, the Service Handbook,
and Service Information bulletins and be ready to respond to the needs of the user.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
RDF-F1 (Recirculating Document Feeder)
Automatically feeds a set of up to 100 originals to the
platen glass for copying. The RDF can also turn over
two-sided originals for automatic two-sided copying.
MS-B1 (10 bins)
Automotically sorts and groups sets of up to
10 copies.
ADF-E1 (Automatic Document Feeder)
Automatically feeds sets of up to 30 originals to
the copyboard for copying.
Control Card IV N
Allows you to monitor the number of
copies made by each card holder.
Stapler Sorter-D2 (10 bins)
Automatically sorts or groups copies
into 10 bins at (30 pages per set).
Staples sets of up to 20 copies
each.
Cassette Feeding Module-B2
Allows you to increase your paper supply
through the addition of one paper cassette.
Cassette Feeding Module-A2
Allows you to increase your paper supply
through the addition of two paper cassettes.
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1
Allows you to increase your
paper supply through the addition
of three paper cassettes.
Paper Deck Pedestal-K1
Holds up to 1500 sheets of one type of paper.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I. FEATURES................................................ 1-1
IV. BASIC OPERATION................................ 1-13
A. Control Panel ..................................... 1-13
B. Making Copies................................... 1-16
C. Using the Stack Bypass .................... 1-17
D. User Mode ......................................... 1-19
V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS ................... 1-26
A. Jam Indicator ..................................... 1-26
B. Cleaning the Static Charge
II. SPECIFICATIONS..................................... 1-2
A. Copier .................................................. 1-2
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/
Cassette Feeding Module-A2/Cassette
Feeding Unit-K1 .................................. 1-5
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ..................... 1-6
III. NAMES OF PARTS ................................... 1-7
A. Exterior ................................................ 1-7
B. Cross Section ...................................... 1-8
Eliminator........................................... 1-33
VI. ROUTINE CLEANING ............................. 1-34
CHAPTER 2 COPYING PROCESS
G. Step 5 (transfer) .................................. 2-5
H. Step 6 (separation) .............................. 2-6
I. Step 7 (fixing) ...................................... 2-7
J. Step 8 (drum cleaning) ........................ 2-7
II. AUXILIARY PROCESS ............................. 2-8
A. Blank Exposure ................................... 2-8
I. IMAGE FORMATION ................................ 2-1
A. Outline ................................................. 2-1
B. Latent Static Image Formation Block .... 2-2
C. Step 1 (pre-exposure) ......................... 2-3
D. Step 2 (primary charging) .................... 2-3
E. Step 3 (image exposure) ..................... 2-4
F. Step 4 (development) .......................... 2-4
CHAPTER 3 OPERATIONS AND TIMING
I. BASIC OPERATIONS ............................... 3-1
A. Functional Construction....................... 3-1
B. Outline of Electrical Circuitry ............... 3-2
C. Inputs to the DC Controller .................. 3-3
D. Outputs from the DC Controller........... 3-8
E. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette
Feeding Module-B2 Driver PCB ........ 3-13
F. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette
Feeding Module-A2 Driver PCB ........ 3-14
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette
Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB ............. 3-16
H. Main Motor Control Circuit................. 3-21
I. Basic Sequence of Operations
(2 copies, continuous, AE) ................ 3-22
J. Original Size Detecton Control .......... 3-23
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM ............................. 3-27
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio ........ 3-27
B. Lens Drive System ............................ 3-27
C. Scanner Drive System....................... 3-31
D. Operations of the Scanner in Page
III. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM .............. 3-35
A. Outline ............................................... 3-35
B. Sequence of Operations
(image formation system) .................. 3-36
C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp ......... 3-37
D. Controlling the Primary Charging
Roller ................................................. 3-38
E. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias .... 3-41
F. Controlling the Static Eliminator
Bias.................................................... 3-44
G. Controlling the Developing Bias ........ 3-46
H. Copy Density Automatic Control ....... 3-48
I. Developing/Cleaning Assembly ........ 3-50
J. Blank Exposure Control..................... 3-53
K. Primary Charging Roller Cleaning
Control ............................................... 3-55
L. Transfer Roller Locking/Releasing
Control ............................................... 3-56
IV. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ................. 3-57
A. Pick-Up from the Machine ................. 3-57
B. Making Two-Sided Copies (1copy) ... 3-61
Separation Mode ............................... 3-34
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Duplexing Unit ................................... 3-63
D. Pick-Up from the Cassette Feeding
Module-A2 ......................................... 3-72
E. Pick-Up from the Cassette Feeding
VI. SERVICE MODE ................................... 3-105
A. Outline ............................................. 3-105
B. Using Service Mode ........................ 3-105
C. Control Display Mode (‘1’) ............... 3-107
D. I/O Mode (‘2’) ................................... 3-110
E. Adjustment Mode (‘3’) ..................... 3-114
F. Operation/Inspection Mode (‘4’) ...... 3-117
G. Machine Settings Mode (‘5’)............ 3-118
H. Counter Mode (‘6’)........................... 3-120
VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS................................. 3-121
A. Copier Self Diagnosis ...................... 3-121
B. Self Diagnosis on the Cassette Feeding
Unit .................................................. 3-124
C. RDF/ADF Self Diagnosis ................. 3-125
D. Sorter Self Diagnosis....................... 3-126
VIII.STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS .... 3-127
A. Electrical .......................................... 3-127
Unit-K1............................................... 3-74
F. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ................... 3-76
G. Multifeeder ......................................... 3-82
H. Identifying the Size of the Cassette... 3-85
I. Fixing/Delivery Assembly .................. 3-87
J. Detecting Jams.................................. 3-92
V. POWER SUPPLY .................................. 3-101
A. Outline of Power Distribution........... 3-101
B. Power Supply Circuitry .................... 3-102
C. Detecting Errors on the Power Supply
PCB ................................................. 3-103
D. Protection Mechanisms for the Power
Supply Circuit .................................. 3-104
CHAPTER 4 MECHANICAL SYSTEM
I. EXTERNALS ............................................. 4-1
A. External Covers ................................... 4-1
B. Control Panel ....................................... 4-2
C. Removing the Display Panel ............... 4-2
D. Fan ...................................................... 4-3
E. Counter ................................................ 4-4
II. DRIVE SYSTEM ........................................ 4-5
A. Scanner Drive System......................... 4-5
B. Lens Drive Assembly......................... 4-10
C. Main Motor......................................... 4-14
III. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ................. 4-15
A. Pick-Up Assembly ............................. 4-15
B. Multifeeder Assembly ........................ 4-17
C. Registration Roller Assembly ............ 4-20
D. Feeding Assembly ............................. 4-22
E. Delivery Assembly ............................. 4-22
F. Duplexing Assembly .......................... 4-23
G. Cassette Unit ..................................... 4-24
H. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ................... 4-27
IV. EXPOSURE SYSTEM............................. 4-34
A. Illuminating Assembly........................ 4-34
V. CHARGING SYSTEM ............................. 4-38
A. Drum Unit .......................................... 4-38
B. Primary Charging Assembly.............. 4-39
C. Transfer Charging Assembly............. 4-40
D. Drum Heater ...................................... 4-41
VI. DEVELOPING SYSTEM ......................... 4-42
VII. FIXING SYSTEM ..................................... 4-45
VIII.ELECTRICAL........................................... 4-50
A. DC Controller PCB ............................ 4-50
B. Composite Power Supply PCB ......... 4-50
C. AE Sensor PCB ................................. 4-51
CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION
VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE.......................................... 5-16
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-16
B. Installation (to copying machine)....... 5-17
C. Installation (to a Cassette Feeding Module-
A2/B2/Cassette Feeding Unit-K1)....... 5-20
VII. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 7 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE.......................................... 5-24
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-24
B. Installation ......................................... 5-25
C. Attaching the Ratings Label .............. 5-27
VIII.INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC
DEVICE II ................................................ 5-28
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-28
B. Installation to the Copier.................... 5-28
I. SELECTING THE SITE ............................. 5-1
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE
COPIER ..................................................... 5-2
A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings....... 5-2
B. Turning On the Copier ......................... 5-5
C. Checking the Images and
Operations ........................................... 5-7
D. Attaching the Drum Unit ...................... 5-8
E. Changing the Cassette Size................ 5-9
III. RELOCATING THE COPIER .................. 5-11
IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT .............. 5-12
V. INSTALLING THE CONTROL
CARD IV N............................................... 5-14
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS....... 6-1
A. Periodically Replaced Parts ................ 6-1
II. DURABLES AND CONSUMABLES .......... 6-2
A. Copier .................................................. 6-2
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2,
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ..................... 6-3
III. BASIC SERVICING ................................... 6-4
IV. SERVICING CHART ................................. 6-5
A. Scheduled Maintenance Work ............ 6-5
Cassette Feeding Module-A2,
and Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 ............ 6-3
APPENDIX
L. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............. A-37
M. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..................... A-1
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ........... A-2
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............... A-5
D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ..... A-7
E. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-21
F. CONTROL PANEL KEY PCB ................ A-27
G. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ......... A-31
H. INTENSITY SENSOR CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-32
I. TONER LEVEL DETECTION CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-33
J. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2
DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................ A-38
N. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 GENERAL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-41
O. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 ............ A-42
P. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 GENERAL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-45
Q. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 DRIVER
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-46
R. SPECIAL TOOLS ................................... A-47
S. SOLVENTS/OILS ................................... A-48
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............. A-34
K. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2
DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................ A-35
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I. FEATURES................................................ 1-1
II. SPECIFICATIONS..................................... 1-2
A. Copier .................................................. 1-2
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/
IV. BASIC OPERATION................................ 1-13
A. Control Panel..................................... 1-13
B. Making Copies................................... 1-16
C. Using the Stack Bypass .................... 1-17
D. User Mode ......................................... 1-19
V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS ................... 1-26
A. Jam Indicator ..................................... 1-26
B. Cleaning the Static Charge
Cassette Feeding Module-A2/Cassette
Feeding Unit-K1 .................................. 1-5
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ..................... 1-6
III. NAMES OF PARTS ................................... 1-7
A. Exterior ................................................ 1-7
B. Cross Section ...................................... 1-8
Eliminator........................................... 1-33
VI. ROUTINE CLEANING ............................. 1-34
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I. FEATURES
When fitted with options, it provides a maximum of four paper sources.
1. Multiple front loading and multifeeder for space saving.
• The cassette may be slid out to the front for paper supply work.
• With the adjustable cassette and the multifeeder, various types of paper may be used.
2. Office conveniences and ecology.
• The copier is designed compact, enabling effective use of office space.
• The use of roller charging has proved to reduce the generation of ozone significantly.(1/100 to 1/1000
compared to other Canon copiers)
• As the pick-up mechanism, center-reference is adopted in consideration of the use of recycled paper.
• A significant number of parts are made of plastic in an effort to promote recycling.
• The copier is designed as a clamshell type to facilitate clearing of jammed paper.
3. Dependable high image quality.
• The new HQ (high-quality) toner ensures faithful reproduction of solid black, text, and photos.
• In addition to Canon’s own single-component toner projection development method, the use of auto
image control (AIC) ensures stable reproduction of images.
4. Practical basic features.
• As many as 21 copies (A4/Letter, horizontal) may be made per minute.
• Copies may be as large as A3/11×17 or as small as A5/STMT, accommodating postcards.
• The AE mechanism promises enhanced reproduction of newspapers or diazo originals.
• Using page separation mode, a book may be copies with its lift and right pages processed separately.
• Copies may be made in zoom between 49% and 204%.
• The zoom fine-adjustment mechanism ensures better control for faithful reproduction of originals.
• The auto energy saver mechanism helps further saving of energy.
• The interrupt mechanism enables cutting in on a continuous copying session.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
II. SPECIFICATIONS
A. Copier
1. Configuration
Specifications
Item
Desktop
Body
Copyboard
Light source
Lens
Fixed
Halogen lamp
Zoom lens
OPC
Photosensitive medium
2. Type
Item
Specifications
Indirect electrostatic photography
Roller (direct charging)
Slit (moving light source)
Automatic (AE) or manual
Dry (toner projection)
2 cassettes
Copying
Charging
Exposure
Copy density adjustment
Development
Automatic
Pick-up
Multifeeder
Manual
Transfer
Separation
Cleaning
Fixing
Roller
Curvature + static eliminator
Cleaning blade
Heat roller, 900W
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. Performance
Item
Specifications
Original type
Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg/2.204 lb. max.)
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
Maximum original size
Reproduction ratio
DIRECT, 2R2E (Table 1-1);
zoom between 49% and 204% (fine zooming provided)
Wait time
30 sec
First copy time
Continuous copying
9.7 sec (approx.; A4, DIRECT, non-AE, cassette 1)
100 copies (max.; upper limit may be changed in service
mode)
Copying speed
Copy size
See Table 1-202.
Cassette: A3 to A5
Manual:
A3 to postcard
Plain paper (64g to 80 g/m2), tracing paper*1, colored paper*1,
recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2), eco paper (80 g/m2)
Cassette
Manual
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper*1, colored paper*1,
recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2), eco paper (80 g/m2 *1), trans-
parency*3, postcard, label sheet*1, Thick paper (81 to 128 g/m2)
Two-sided/overlay copying*2
Cassette
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), colored paper, postcard, recycled
paper (64 to 80 g/m2), eco paper (80 g/m2)
34 mm deep (approx.; about 250 sheets of 80 g/m2); no claw,
front loading (center reference)
5 mm (max. stacking height; i.e., about 50 sheets of 80 g/m2);
no claw (center reference)
Multifeeder
100 sheets (approx.: A3, 80 g/m2)
Copy tray
Non-image width
One-sided
Multifeeder
2.0 ±1.0 mm (leading edge); 2.5 ±1.5 mm (left/right, trailing edge)
2.0 ±1.0 mm (leading edge); 3.5 ±1.5 mm (left/right, trailing edge)
Auto clear
Auto power-off
Options
Provided (2 min standard; may be varied in 1-min increments
between 1 and 9 min; may be deactivated)
Provided (5 min standard; 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, or 120 min;
may be varied in user mode)
Cassette Feeding Module-B2, Cassette Feeding Module-A2,
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1, Control Card IV N, Stapler Sorter-
D2, Sorter 10-B1, ADF-E1, RDF-F1, Paper Deck Pedestal-
K1, Remote Diagnostic Device II
*1 Canon recommended paper.
*2 If in manual mode, remove curling before second feeding.
*3 Fan out sheets before setting to eliminate adhesion.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4. Others
Item
Temperature
Specifications
7.5° to 32.5°C/45.5 to 90.5°F
5% to 85%
Operating environment Humidity
Atmospheric pressure 810.6 hPa to 10313.3 hPa (0.8 to 1 atm)
Serial numbers
Power supply
230 V (50Hz)
Standby
QBSxxxxx, UDNxxxxx, SBExxxxx, TBHxxxxx, UDPxxxxx
0.042 kwh (reference only)
Power consumption
Continuous copying 0.663 kwh (reference only)
Copying
Standby
66 dB or less (1m front)
40 dB or less (1m front)
0.02 ppm or less
585 mm
By ISO sound power level
measurement
Noise
Ozone (avr over 8 hr)
Width
Depth
Height
Dimensions
640 mm
624 mm
Weight
77 kg/169.8 lb (approx.)
Copy paper
Cartridge
Keep wrapped; store avoiding humidity.
Consumables
Avoid direct sunshine; store at 40°C/104°F, 85% or less.
1: 1 (±0.5%)
DIRECT
230V
1: 0.500
REDUCE I
1: 0.707
Reproduction ratio REDUCE II
ENLARGE I
1: 1.414
1: 2.000
ENLARGE II
49% to 204 % (1% increments)
ZOOM
Table 1-201 Defaults Reproduction Ratio
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Q’ty
11
21
21
12
21
16
18
18
20
15
17
12
12
14
Reproduction ratio
Copy size
(297 × 420)
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
(210 × 297)
(148 × 210)
(257 × 364)
(182 × 257)
DIRECT
1: 1 (±0.5%)
A4R (297 × 210)
A5R (210 × 148)
B5R (257 × 182)
1: 0.500 (+1.0%)
1: 0.707 (+1.0%)
A3
→
→
→
→
→
→
A5R
A4R
B5R
A3
REDUCE
A3
B4
1: 2.000 (+1.0%)
1: 1.414 (+1.0%)
A5R
A4R
B5R
ENLARGE
A3
B4
Table 1-202 Copying Speeds
Specifications subject to change without notice.
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/Cassette Feeding Module-A2/
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1
Copy paper type
Same as copier.
Cassette specifications
Power supply
Same as copier
34 VDC, 24 V, 5 V (supplied by copier)
Dimensions (WxDxH; mm/in)
Cassette Feeding Module-B2: 585 × 622 × 105/23.0 × 24.5 × 4.1
Cassette Feeding Module-A2: 585 × 622 × 210/23.0 × 24.5 × 8.3
Cassette Feeding Unit-KI:
585 × 622 × 384/23.0 × 24.5 × 15.1
Cassette Feeding Module-B2: 9 kg/19.8 lb
Cassette Feeding Module-A2: 16 kg/32.3 lb
Weight
Cassette Feeding Unit-KI:
29.6 kg/65.3 lb
Table 1-203
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1
Method of pick-up
Loading method
Type of paper
Clawless
Front loading
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), Colored paper*
A4 (landscape), B5 (landscape), LTR (landscape)
Size of paper
162 mm high (one side; equivalent of 1500 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper)
Partitioning plate (incremental)
Capacity
Switching (size)
Control panel
Display
No (use copier' s control panel)
No (see copier' s display)
34 VDC, 24 V, 5 V (supplied by copier)
31.7 kg/70.0 lb
Power supply
Weight
Dimensions (W × D × H; mm/in) 610 × 583 × 414/24.0 × 21.4 × 16.3
Table 1-204
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
III. NAMES OF PARTS
1
A. Exterior
7
2
6
5
3
4
q Copyboard cover
w Power switch
e Multifeeder
t Front door
y Control panel
u Copyboard glass
r Cassette
Figure 1-301
1
6
2
5
3
4
r Static eliminator
t Copy tray
y Anti-condensation heater switch (rear)
q Body open/close lever
w Copy density correction volume
e Static eliminator cleaner
Fluorescent heater switch (front)
Figure 1-302
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B. Cross Section
1. Cross Section of the Body
1
4
6
7
8
9
10
2
3
5
11
13
12
14
15 16 17
23
20
22
21
19
18
q No. 3 mirror
w No. 2 mirror
e No. 1 mirror
r Scanning lamp
t Fixing unit
y Feeding assembly
u Copyboard glass
i Drum unit
!
!
!
@
@
@
@
7
Cassette 1 pick-up roller
Vertical path roller 2
Vertical path roller 1
Cassette 2 pick-up roller
Duplexing unit
o Lens
8
9
0
1
2
3
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Primary charging roller
Transfer roller
No. 6 mirror
Developing assembly
No. 4 mirror
No. 5 mirror
Delivery paper deflecting plate
Delivery roller
Multifeeder pick-up roller
Figure 1-303
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2
1
4
2
3
5
6
q Cassette 3
w Cassette 4
r Cassette 4 pick-up roller
t Drive roller
e Cassette 3 pick-up roller
y Feeding roller
Figure 1-304
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. Cassette Feeding Unit-K1
1
4
2
3
5
6
9
8
7
q Cassette 3
w Cassette 4
y Vertical path roller 3
u Vertical path roller 5
e Cassette 3 pick-up roller
r Cassette 4 pick-up roller
t Vertical path roller 4
i Cassette 5 pick-up roller
o Cassette 5
Figure 1-305
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
t Deck separation roller
y Lifter
u Deck
q Deck pick-up roller
w Deck vertical path roller
e Vertical path roller 3
r Deck feeding roller
Figure 1-306
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IV. BASIC OPERATION
A. Control Panel
1
2
3
7
8
9 10 11
15
20 21
22
23
4
5
6
12
13 14 16 17 18
19
24
25
26
Figure 1-401
Flashes when the original size needs to be selected.
* Select the original size with the paper select key, and then press the OK
key.
q Sorter key
Press to set or cancel the Sort, Staple Sort, and Group modes.
Sort mode: When copying a multi-page document, copies are automatically sorted into
sets arranged in page order.
Flashes when the copy size needs to be entered.
* Enter the copy size with the Number keys, and then press the Ok key.
* To use this mode, your copier must be equipped with the optional Stapler Sorter, Sorter,
or ADF/RDF.
Flashes when the control card is not properly inserted.
i Check Control Card indicator
o Paper Jam indicator
Staple Sort mode: When copying a multi-page document, copies are automatically sorted
into sets arranged in page order and then stapled.
* To use this mode, your copier must be equipped with the optional Stapler Sorter.
Group mode: When copying a multi-page document, all copies of the same original page
are grouped together, and output into different bins.
1 2 3
Flashes when a paper jam occurs.
Flashes when the paper supply in the cassete or stack bypass tray runs out, and when the
cassette is not properly set.
Flashes when the toner runs low and must be replaced with a new one.
!
!
!
0
1
2
Add Paper indicator
* To use this mode, your copier must be equipped with the optional Stapler Sorter or Sorter.
Replace Toner Cartridge
indicator
Paper Supply/Jam Location
indicator
w Two-sided key (left side)
Press to set or cancel the following two-sided copy modes: 1 2-sided, 2 2-sided, 2 1-sided, Book 2-sided.
1
2-sided: Makes two-sided copies from one-sided originals.
2
Lights to indicate the selected paper cassete or stack bypass. When a paper jam occurs, the location of the paper
jam flashes. It also lights when the Sorter or right door needs to be inspected, or when a paper jam occurs in the
ADF/RDF.
When you do not know the total page number of the original, the copier automatically
counts the original.
A
Press to select Auto Paper selection, a paper cassette, or the stack bypass.
The size of the original/copy paper selected with the Paper select key lights.
Displays the entered copy quantity copy ratio, and Additional Functions settings.
!
!
!
3
4
5
Paper select key
Select paper size indicator
Copy quantity/copy ratio
display
OK key
Auto Zoom key
Select when you know beforehand that there is an odd number of originals. This will save
the time spent on counting the original.
Select this when you know beforehand that there is an even number of originals.
This will save the time spent on counting the original.
3 · 5····
2 · 4····
2
Press to confirm items and functions that have been selected when setting modes.
Press to set or cancel the Auto Zoom mode. Auto Zoom automatically selects the appropriate copy ratio, based on
the size of the originals and the selected copy paper.
!
!
6
7
e Two-sided key (right side)
2
2-sided: Makes two-sided copies from two-side originals.
2
2
1-sided: Makes one-sided copies from two-sided originals.
2
Press to set or cancel the Zoom mode. Zoom mode allows you to specify a copy ratio from 49 to 204% in 1%
increments. Continue pressing for fast selection.
Press to display the selected copy ratio.
Press to return the settings to standard mode.
Press to stop the coper before copying is completed.
Press the enter copy quantity and other numerical values when setting a mode.
Press to turn the power ON and OFF.
Press to begin copying.
Press to return the copy quantity to one, or to clear an incorrectly entered value when setting a mode.
Press to temporarily stop the current copy job to make priority copies.
!
8
Zoom key
Book 2-sided: Makes two-sided copies from facing pages in a book.
2
!
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
% key
Reset key
Stop key
Number keys
Power switch
Start key
Clear key
Interrupt key
r AE key
Press to set or cancel the AE (Automatic Exposure) mode.
Press to manually adjust the copy exposure.
Press to enlarge or reduce using a preset copy ratio, or to return the copier to 100% copying (1:1).
Place originals in feeder
t Copy exposure key
y Reduce/1:1/Enlarge key
u Message display
Flashes when the original in the feeder needs to be reloaded.
Flashes when the width of the edges to be erased or the margin needs to be
specified.
* Enter the measurement with the Number keys and then press the OK key.
Flashes when the first original copied needs to be replaced with the next one.
Flashes when the copy ratio needs to be specified.
Enter frame erase/margin size
Replace originals
Set copy ratio
Table 1-402
* Enter the copy ratio with the preset copy ratio key, the reduce/1:1/enlarge
keys, or the Zoom key, and then press the OK key.
Select paper size
Enter original size
Flashes when the paper size needs to be specified.
* Select a paper size with the paper select key, and then press the OK key.
Flashes when the original size needs to be specified.
* Enter the original size with the Number keys and then press the OK key.
Table 1-401
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
w
e
q
Figure 1-402
q Transparency Interleaving key
Press to set or cancel the Transparency Interleaving mode.
The interleaf sheets are printed with the same images as the transparencies.
The interleaf sheets are left blank.
w Two-page Separation/Image
Copies facing pages in a bound original onto two copy sheets.
2 ON 1: Reduces two originals to fit on one side of a single copy sheet.
2 ON 1/2 Sided: Reduces four originals to fit on two sides of a single copy sheet.
Combination key (left side)
2
e Additional Functions key
Press to set or change standard settings and custom settings according to specific user needs, and when
adjusting and cleaning the copier.
Table 1-403
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3) Press the
key.
B. Making Copies
a. After copying begins, you cannot change the
number of copies, paper size, copy ratio or
other copy settings.
b. The copier’s counter automatically counts up
one as each copy is output to the copy tray.
1) Place your originals.
a. Placing originals on the platen glass
• Lift the platen glass cover.
• Place your original on the platen glass. The
surface that you want to copy must face
down. Aligntheedgeoftheoriginalwiththe →
mark in the centre of the platen glass.
• Gently lower the platen glass cover.
1
4
2
5
8
0
7
C
Figure 1-405
c. If you want to stop the copier before copying is
complete, press the
key.
Figure 1-403
Reference:
Pressing the
settings. To clear the copy settings, press the
key.
b. Placing originals in the ADF or RDF (option)
• Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your
originals.
key will not clear the copy
• Neatly stack your originals face up in the
original tray.
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
7
Figure 1-406
Figure 1-404
2) Programme the copy settings.
0
9
• Press the
-
keys to enter the number of
copies.
• Press the
exposure.
•Pressthe
• Press the
copy ratio.
-
keys to adjust the copy
keytoselectthecopypapersize.
keys to select a preset
-
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1) Place your originals.
C. Using the Stack Bypass
You can place up to 50 sheets of copy paper (a
stack approximately 5 mm high) in the stack bypass
tobeautomaticallyfedintothecopier. Usethestack
bypass when you want to copy on special stock,
suchastransparenciesorlabels, orwhenthepaper
sizethatyouwanttocopyonwillnotfitinacassette.
Note:
Note the following points when using the stack
bypass:
Figure 1-407
a. Paper size: A5 (horizontal placement) to A3
b. Paper weight: 64 to 128 g/m2
c. Acceptable paper
• Plain paper (64 to 128 g/m2)
• Coloured paper
• No. 2 master drawing paper
• Labels
• Transparencies
• Postcards
Figure 1-408
• Recycled paper
d. Curl down copy stock before use.
e. There are some types of copy stock which meet
the above specifications but which cannot be
fed in the stack bypass.
2) Programme the copy settings.
3) Open the stack bypass.
Notes:
1. Do not use the sort/staple-sort/group mode
when copying postcards as it may result in
a paper jam.
2. A5R-size copy paper cannot be used to
make two-sided or overlay copies.
3. Insert A4-size labels horizontally.
4. If you want the copy stock placed in the
stack bypass to be selected when using
Auto Paper Selection, specify the size.
Figure 1-409
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4) Adjust the slide guides to fit the size
of the copy stock.
5) Align the required number of sheets
of copy stock with the slide guides.
The surface that you want to copy on
must face up. Insert the copy stock
into the copier until it stops.
Reference:
1. Be sure to adjust the slide guides to fit the
size of the copy stock.
2. When feeding A4R or A3-size copy stock,
pull out the auxiliary tray.
Notes:
1. Make sure that the height of the paper is not
higher than the limit mark on the inside of
the slide guides.
2. If the Stack Bypass Size Entry in Custom
Settings is ON, select a paper size at this
point.
Figure 1-410
Maximum
level
Slide guides
Limit mark
Figure 1-412
6) Press the
key until the stack
bypass lights on the Paper Supply
indicator.
mm
%
Auxiliary tray
Autom.Paper
A3
A4
Figure 1-411
OK
A4 R
A5
A5 R
%
Autom.Zoom
ZOOM
Figure 1-413
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7) Press the
key.
D. User Mode
If you set the Two-sided, Two-page separation,
Overlay, Image Separation or Transparency
Interleaving modes in step 1 for stack bypass
feeding, and you have not selected the size of the
paper to be fed, the Paper Size indicator flashes.
1. Outline
You can change or adjust the factory settings for
various functions to meet your specific copying
needs. It is also possible to perform cleaning and to
make adjustments to the copier.
You can change or adjust the settings for the
following items:
1
4
2
5
8
0
Function
01 Auto Clear Time
Initial setting
2 min.
5 min.
0%
7
02 Auto Energy Saver Time
03 Zoom Fine Adjustment
04 Auto Cassette Selection ON/OFF
05 Stack Bypass Size Specification ON/OFF
06 Auto Sort ON/OFF
C
ON
OFF
ON
07 Feeder Cleaning
Figure 1-414
key to select the size of the paper to
08 Standard Copy Settings
09 Input Unit mm/Inch Selection
2 min.
00 Initializing Additional Functions NP Drum Cartridge Counter
Press the
be fed into the stack bypass.
Table 1-404
mm
%
Autom.Paper
A4
2. The Use of Keys and Displays That
Appear When Changing the Settings
OK
A
A5 R
%
Autom.Zoom
a. The Use of Keys
Aditional
Function
•
key : Press this key to set or cancel the
Additional Functions and return to
the normal copying mode.
key : Press this key to indicate the item
that you want to change.
key : Press this key to clear any mistakes
thatyouhavemadewhenchanging
the settings. Also press this key to
return to the last previous setting
that you had entered.
ZOOM
OK
•
•
Figure 1-415
C
OK
Then press the
key. If the size you want cannot
key so that the Stack
Bypass Size Entry display disappears, then press
be selected, press the
OK
the
key.
• Copy Quantity/Copy Ratio Display
3
mm
%
Autom.Paper
A3
A4
OK
Press the
key.
OK
A4 R
A5
The number for a function that can be set.
The present setting for a certain function.
A5 R
Autom.Zoom
Figure 1-417
ZOOM
Figure 1-416
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Reference:
3. Auto Clear Time
1. The initial setting for the Auto Clear Time is
2 minutes.
2. You can set Auto Clear Time from 1 to 9
minutes, in one-minute increments.
Ifthecopierisnotoperated(nokeysarepressed)
for a certain period of time, the copier automatically
returns to the standard copy settings. This time
period is called the “Auto Clear Time.” You can
cancel or freely change the Auto Clear Time.
Auto Clear Time can be set from 1 to 9 minutes
in one-minute increments.
0
3. To cancel this function, press the key.
4. If you make a mistake while entering a
value, enter the correct value and it will
Aditional
Function
replacetheincorrectonethatwaspreviously
1) Press the
key.
C
entered, or press the
key and after the
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy
display clears, enter the correct value.
ratio display.
TocontinuesettingotherAdditionalFunctions,
1
press the
key.
OK
5) Press the
key.
The Auto Clear Time is changed and “U01” is
displayed.
Reference:
Once you set the Additional Functions mode,
the key turns red and copying operations
Reference:
cannot be initiated.
OK
If the
key is pressed before the
key is
pressed, the Auto Clear Time that was set is
cleared and the copier returns to the normal
copying mode.
2) Check the Copy quantity/Copy ratio display.
If “U01” is displayed, proceed to the next step.
Reference:
If“U01”isnotdisplayedorifyoumakeamistake
while entering a value, press either the key or
4. Auto Energy Saver Time
Aditional
Function
1) Press the
key.
1
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
C
1
press the key and then the key.
2
2) Press the
3) Press the
key.
key.
OK
OK
3) Press the
key.
• The current setting is displayed in the Copy
quantity/Copy ratio display.
• The current setting is displayed in the Copy
quantity/Copy ratio display.
• The possible settings for Auto Clear Time
appear in the Copy quantity / Copy ratio
display as follows:
The possible settings for Auto Energy Saver
Time appear in the Copy quantity / Copy ratio
display as follows:
Auto Clear Time (min.)
Settings
–0
Auto Energy Saver Time (min.)
Settings
–1
0
1
2
3
2
5
–1
–2
–2
10
–3
–3
–4
15
30
–4
4
5
6
7
8
9
–5
–6
–7
–5
–6
–7
–8
–9
60
120
Table 1-406
4) Enter the Auto Energy Saver Time with the
7
1
Table 1-405
Number keys (
-
).
• The setting time is displayed in the Copy
4) Enter the Auto Clear Time with the Number
quantity/Copy ratio display.
OK
0
keys (
-
).
5) Press the
key.
9
• The setting time is displayed in the Copy
quantity/Copy ratio display.
• The Auto Energy Saver Time is changed and
“U02” is displayed.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
a. Zoom Fine Adjustment (Reduction): Press the
key.
5. Zoom Fine Adjustment
• If there is a slight difference in size between the
original and output copy images when the copy
ratio is set to 100% (direct), use this function to
correct the error. Adjustments can be made
independentlyintheX(horizontal)andY(vertical)
directions.
Initial
setting
(±0%)
You can make adjustments from –1% to +1%, in
0.2% increments.
(–0.2%)
• Press the
keys to adjust the copy ratio for
Zoom Fine Adjustment. The zoom fine
adjustments can be confirmed by looking at the
copy exposure display.
• Confirm fine adjustments by making copies and
comparing them with the original.
(–0.4%)
(–0.6%)
(–0.8%)
• Even if you press the
key, the zoom fine
adjustments made in the Additional Functions
mode will not change.
• The zoom fine adjustments are also effective
when making reduced/enlarged copies.
Aditional
Function
1) Press the
key.
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,
the key turns red and copying operations
(–1.0 %)
cannot be initiated.
3
2) Press the
key.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
3
C
b. Zoom Fine Adjustment (Enlargement): Press
press either the key or press the key and
3
the
key.
then the key.
OK
3) Press the
key.
Initial
setting
• “–1” is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display, and the current setting in the X
direction is displayed in the copy exposure
display.
(±0%)
• TheX,YdirectionsappearintheCopyquantity/
Copy ratio display as follows:
(+0.2%)
Adjustment Directions
Settings
X direction
Y direction
–1
–2
(+0.4%)
(+0.6%)
(+0.8%)
(+1.0 %)
Table 1-407
• Fine adjustments ratios are displayed in the
copy exposure display as follows:
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4
4) Make fine adjustments to the copy ratio in the X
direction.
2) Press the
key.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
C
• Press the Exposure keys (
adjust the copy ratio.
• TheinitialsettingforZoomFineAdjustmentis
0%.
) to
press either the START key or press the
4
key and then the key.
OK
3) Press the
key.
• The Paper Supply/Jam Location indicator for
the upper cassette of the copier main unit light
continuously.Thecurrentsettingfortheupper
cassette of the copier main unit is displayed in
the Copy quantity/Copy ratio display.
The ON/OFF settings for the Auto Cassette
Switching function are as shown in the table
below.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
C
press the key and then re-enter the value.
OK
5) Press the
key.
• The fine adjustments to the copy ratio in the X
direction are made.
• Then “–2” is displayed in the Copy quantity/
Copy ratio display and the current setting for
the Y direction is displayed in the copy
exposure display.
Auto Cassette Switching
Settings
–1
ON
6) Adjust the copy ratio in the Y direction.
OFF
–0
• Press the Exposure keys (
adjust the copy ratio.
• TheinitialsettingforZoomFineAdjustmentis
0%.
) to
Table 1-408
4) Press the Number keys (
0
,
) to select Auto
1
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
Cassette Switching ON or OFF for the top
cassette in the copier main unit. The current
setting is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
C
press the key and then re-enter the value.
OK
7) Press the
key.
• TheZoomFineAdjustmentissetand“U03”is
displayed.
• The initial setting for Auto Cassette Selection
is ON.
OK
• If the
key is pressed before the key is
pressed, the Zoom Fine Adjustment that was
set is cleared and the copier returns to the
normal copying mode.
• If coloured paper or another type of special
copy stock of the same size is loaded in one
of the paper cassettes, then you may not want
the copier to automatically switch the paper
cassette. Select OFF.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
enter the correct value and it will replace the
incorrect one that was previously entered, or
6. Auto Cassette Switching ON/OFF
• Auto Cassette Switching ON/OFF
This function sets Auto Paper Selection and Auto
Cassette Switching for each cassette.
(Auto Paper Switching automatically selects the
appropriate copy paper (cassette) according to
thesizeoftheoriginalandtheselectedcopyratio.
Auto Cassette Switching automatically supplies
paper from another paper cassette loaded with
thesamepapersizeiftheselectedpapercassette
runs out during continuous copying.)
C
press the key and after the display clears,
enter the correct value.
5) Press the
key.
• The bottom cassette of the copier main unit
lights.
0
6) Press the Number keys (
,
) to select Auto
1
Cassette Switching ON or OFF for the bottom
cassette in the copier main unit.
• Repeat steps ➎ and ➏ to select the Auto
Cassette Switching for all of the cassettes.
• This procedure is the same when the copier
is equipped with the optional Cassette Feed-
Auto Cassette Switching can be set individually
for each cassette.
ON:
Cassettes are selected automatically.
OFF: Cassettes are only selected manually.
• The initial setting for Auto Cassette Switching is
ON.
ing Module or Cassette Pedestal.
Aditional
Function
OK
7) Press the
key.
1) Press the
key.
• Auto Cassette Switching ON or OFF is set
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
and “U04” is displayed.
OK
• If the
key is pressed before the key is
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,
the key turns red and copying operations
cannot be initiated.
pressed,thechangedAutoCassetteSwitching
ON/OFF setting is cleared and the copier
returns to the normal copying mode.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
OK
• If the
key is pressed before the key is
7. Stack Bypass Size Entry ON/OFF
• When making two-sided and overlay copies, etc.
on copy paper placed in the stack bypass, you
must specify the size of the paper.
pressed, the changed Stack Bypass Size
Entry ON/OFF setting is cleared and the
copier returns to the normal copying mode.
OFF: The “SELECT PAPER SIZE” display
flashes and the stack bypass paper size
8. Auto Sort ON/OFF (When equipped
withtheADF/RDFandStaplerSorter/
Sorter (options))
• AutoSortisafunctionwhichautomaticallyoutputs
copies in the Non-Sort mode if your copier is
equipped with the ADF/RDF and Stapler Sorter/
Sorter (options) and the original is only one sheet
or one set of copies, or in the Sort mode if the
original is more than one sheet or one set of
copies.
is specified when the
key is pressed
only if necessary according to the set
copy mode.
ON:
The “SELECT PAPER SIZE” display
flashes and the stack bypass paper size
is specified when copy paper is placed in
the stack bypass.
Likethepapercassettes,thestackbypass
can also be selected during Auto Paper
and Auto Zoom.
When Auto Sort is OFF, copies are output in the
mode indicated by the Sorter indicator.
• The initial setting for Stack Bypass Size
Specification is OFF.
ON:
Copies are automatically output in the
Sort mode
Aditional
Function
1) Press the
key.
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
OFF: Copies are output in the mode indicated
by the Sorter indicator.
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,
the key turns red and copying operations
cannot be initiated.
The Sort mode is selected with the Sorter
key.
• The initial setting for Auto Sort is ON.
Aditional
Function
5
2) Press the
key.
1) Press the
key.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,
the key turns red and copying operations
cannot be initiated.
C
5
press either the key or press the key and
5
then the key.
OK
3) Press the
key.
• The current setting is displayed in the Copy
quantity/Copy ratio display.
6
2) Press the
key.
• TheStackBypassSizeEntryON/OFFsettings
appear as follows.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
C
6
press either the key or press the key and
6
then the key.
Stack Bypass Size Entry ON/OFF
Settings
–1
OK
3) Press the
key.
ON
• The current setting is displayed in the Copy
quantity/Copy ratio display.
The settings for the Auto Sort appear in the
Copy quantity/Copy ratio display as follows:
OFF
–0
Table 1-409
0
4) Press the Number keys (
,
) to select stack
1
Auto Sort
ON
Settings
–1
bypass Size Entry ON or OFF. The current
setting is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
OFF
–0
• The initial setting for Stack Bypass Size Entry
is OFF.
Table 1-410
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
enter the correct value and it will replace the
incorrect one that was previously entered, or
C
press the key and after the display clears,
enter the correct value.
OK
5) Press the
key.
• Stack Bypass Size Entry ON or OFF is set
and “U5” is displayed.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4) Press the Number keys (
Sort ON/OFF.
,
) to select Auto
0
1
10. Standard Copy Settings (Store/Ini-
tialize)
• The Standard Copy Settings which are set when
• The settings are displayed in the Copy
quantity/Copy ratio display.
the
key is pressed can be changed and
• The initial setting for Auto Sort is ON.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
enter the correct value and it will replace the
incorrect one that was previously entered, or
stored as desired. In addition, the changed
Standard Copy Settings can be returned to initial
settings.
• The factory-preset (initial) standard copy settings
are as follows:
C
press the key and after the display clears,
enter the correct value.
• Copy exposure
Automatic
Control
Exposure
OK
5) Press the
key.
• Auto Sort ON or OFF is set and “U06” is
• Paper selection
Auto Paper Selection
displayed.
• Number of copies 1
OK
• If the
key is pressed before the key is
• Copy output
• Copying
Non-Sort
1 → 1 Sided
pressed, the changed setting is cleared and
thecopierreturnstothenormalcopyingmode.
• Copy ratio
Direct (100%)
Aditional
Function
1) Press the
key.
9. Feeder Cleaning (When equipped
with the ADF/RDF (options))
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
• This function automatically cleans the ADF/RDF
(option) Feeding Roller when it becomes dirty
with pencil lead, etc. If your originals have black
streaks or appear dirty after feeding them into the
ADF/RDF, perform Feeder Cleaning. Cleaning is
accomplished by repeated feeding of blank
originals (copy sheets) through the ADF/RDF.
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,
the key turns red and copying operations
cannot be initiated.
8
2) Press the
key.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
C
8
press either the key or press the key and
8
then the key.
Aditional
Function
OK
1) Press the
key.
3) Press the
key.
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
• “–1” is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy
Ratio display.
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,
the key turns red and copying operations
• ThesettingsforStandardCopySeetingStore/
Initialize are as shown in the table below.
cannot be initiated.
Standard Copy Setting Store/Initialize
Settings
–1
7
2) Press the
key.
Store
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
Initialize
–0
C
7
press either the key or press the key and
then re-enter the value.
Table 1-411
3) Place about 10 blank A4-size originals (copy
sheets) in the ADF/RDF. Then, press the
key.
0
4) Press the Number keys (
,
) to select
1
Standard Copy Settings Store or Initialize.
• The settings are displayed in the Copy
quantity/Copy ratio display.
• Feeder Cleaning begins.
• To stop Feeder Cleaning before it is com-
pleted, press the
• To use this function, your copier must be
equipped with the ADF/RDF.
key.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
enter the correct value and it will replace the
incorrect one that was previously entered, or
C
• Use blank A4-size originals to perform
cleaning.
• Dirt will be picked up on the blank originals
used for cleaning.
press the key and after the display clears,
enter the correct value.
OK
5) Press the
key.
• The Standard Copy Settings are stored or
• During feeder cleaning, “U08” flashes in the
copyquantitydisplay. Afterfeedercleaningis
finished , “U08” stops flashing and lights.
initialized and “U08” is displayed.
OK
• If the
key is pressed before the key is
pressed, the changed settings for Standard
Copy Setting Store/Initialize are cleared and
thecopierreturnstothenormalcopyingmode.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
11. Initializing User Mode
• The settings that were changed in the Additional
Functions mode can be restored to their initial
settings.
Aditional
Function
1) Press the
key.
• “U01” appears in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
• Once you set the Additional Functions mode,
the key turns red and copying operations
cannot be initiated.
0
2) Press the
key twice.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
C
0
presseitherthe keytwiceorpressthe key
0
and then press the key twice.
OK
3) Press the
key.
• “–1” is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
0
4) Press the
key.
• “–0” is displayed in the Copy quantity/Copy
ratio display.
• If you make a mistake while entering a value,
enter the correct value and it will replace the
incorrect one that was previously entered, or
C
press the key and after the display clears,
enter the correct value.
OK
5) Press the
key.
• The Additional Functions are initialized and
“U00” is displayed.
Note:
If the
OK
key is pressed before the
key is
pressed, theAdditionalFunctionsarenotinitial-
ized, and the copier will return to the normal
copying mode.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
V. WARNINGS AND
ACTIONS
A. Jam Indicator
1. WhenqFlashesontheControlPanel
1) Open the front door.
Drum
Figure 1-504
Caution:
1. The area surrounding the fixing assembly
gets hot during copying. When clearing a
paper jam in that area, be careful. Do not
touch any part of the fixing assembly,
because you could burn yourself.
2. Whenremovingjammedpaperorotherwise
inspecting the inside of the copier, do not
allow necklaces, bracelets or other metal
objects to touch the inside of the copier, as
this may result in burns or electrical shock.
3. When removing copy paper which has
become jammed from inside the copier,
take care not to allow the toner on the
jammed copy paper to come into contact
with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty
your hands and clothing. If they become
dirty, wash them immediately with cold
water. Washing with warm water will set the
toner and make it impossible to remove
toner stains.
Figure 1-501
2) Lift the green lever on the left side to open the
top of the main unit.
Figure 1-502
4. When removing copy paper which has
become jammed from inside the copier,
remove the jammed copy paper gently to
prevent the toner on the paper from
scattering and entering your eyes or mouth.
If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash
immediately with cold water and consult a
physician.
3) Slowly remove any jammed paper, taking care
not to tear it.
• If a paper jam occurs in a location similar to
that shown in the picture to the lower, slowly
turn the green knob in the direction of the
arrows and remove the jammed paper.
Notes:
1. If the jammed paper tears while removing it,
be sure to remove any pieces remaining
inside the copier.
2. Do not touch the purple colored surface of
the drum; doing so will adversely affect the
copy quality.
!
Fixing assembly
Knob
Figure 1-503
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4) Gently close the top of the main unit.
• If a paper jam occurs in a location similar to
that shown in the picture to the lower, slowly
pull the paper out in the direction of the
arrows, taking care not to tear it.
Figure 1-509
5) If a paper jam occurs while using the stack
bypass, remove paper placed there and then
gently remove any paper jammed in the stack
bypass so that it does not tear.
Figure 1-505
Figure 1-506
Figure 1-510
• If you cannot find the jammed paper, lift the
lever as shown in the picture. If paper is
jammed here, gently remove the paper so
that it does not tear.
6) Close the stack bypass, then open the right
door of the copier main unit cassette.
Lever
Figure 1-511
Figure 1-507
Figure 1-508
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7) Place your finger on the inner guide.
• Push the inner guide down towards you and
gently pull out any jammed paper so that it
does not tear.
• After inspecting all areas that appeared on
the control panel, and removing all jammed
paper, close the front door.
If the Sorter/Stapler Sorter (options) is
attached, after closing the main unit, return
theSorter/StaplerSortertoitsoriginalposition.
If a paper jam occurred while using the ADF/
RDF (options), after clearing the paper jam,
place the first page of the original back in the
ADF/RDF and press the
key. The copier
will make the remaining copies.
• It is not necessary to enter the number of
copies again after removing jammed paper.
The copier automatically senses the number
of jammed sheets, and adjusts the number of
copies accordingly.
Figure 1-512
Figure 1-513
Figure 1-515
8) Securely close the right door of the cassette.
• When using the stack bypass, place the copy
paper in the stack bypass.
2. WhenwFlashesontheControlPanel
• If q and w both flash at the same time, check q
first before checking w.
1) Open the front door.
Figure 1-514
Figure 1-516
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2) Open the right door of the cassette.
• Place your finger on the green finger grip and
pull open the inner guide for the copier main
unit cassette. If the Cassette Feeding Module
or Paper Deck (options) is attached, open
both doors.
4) If you cannot clear the paper jam after following
steps
and , then pull out the cassette.
➊
➋
Note:
If you cannot see the cassette because the
front door is in the way, close the front door.
After you have cleared the paper jam, open and
close the front door once again.
Figure 1-517
3) Gentlypulloutanyjammedpapersothatitdoes
not tear.
Figure 1-520
• If a paper jam is located in the Paper Deck
(options), then pull the green grip and pull out
any jammed paper.
5) Remove any paper that is sticking out of the
cassette.
Figure 1-521
Figure 1-518
6) Return the cassette to its original position and
securely close the inner guide and right door for
the copier main unit cassette, or the right door
of the Paper Deck (options).
Figure 1-519
Figure 1-522
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
7) After inspecting all jam location areas that
appeared on the control panel, and removing
any jammed paper, close the front door.
2) If the indicator e lights, close the Stapler Sorter
cover and return the Sorter/Stapler Sorter to its
original position.
If a paper jam occurred while using the ADF/
RDF (options), after clearing the paper jam,
place the first page of the original back in the
If the indicator e lights after making copies,
remove any copy paper that is located in the
Sorter bins.
ADF/DRF and press the
key. The copier will
make the remaining copies.
4
1
3
2
2
Figure 1-526
Figure 1-523
3. If
Lights (Checking the Right
Door/Sorter/Stapler Sorter)
1) If the w indicator lights, then check to make
surethattherightdoorofthecassetteissecurely
closed.
If not, close it securely.
Figure 1-527
4
1
3
2
2
Figure 1-524
Figure 1-528
Figure 1-525
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4. If
Flashes (Replacing the Toner
Cartridge)
• If the toner has run low, the Replace Toner
Cartridge indicator ( ) will flash.
Followtheproceduredescribedbelowandreplace
the used toner cartridge with a new one.
1) Open the front door.
Lever
Note:
Do not lift the green lever on the left side to open
the top of the main unit. Some toner may spill
out of the toner cartridge opening.
Figure 1-530
Figure 1-531
Figure 1-529
3) Prepare a new toner cartridge.
2) Grip the handle of the toner cartridge.
Pushinthecartridgeleverandturnthecartridge
clockwise until it reaches a horizontal position.
When the handle is at a horizontal position pull
out the toner cartridge.
Caution:
When removing used toner cartridges from the
copier,removethecartridgescarefullytoprevent
toner from scattering and entering your eyes or
mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash
immediately with cold water and consult a
physician.
Figure 1-532
4) Hold the new toner cartridge level.
• Shake the cartridge to evenly distribute the
toner within the cartridge.
Warning:
Do not throw toner cartridges into open fires, as
this may cause the toner to ignite and result in
burnsorfire.Whendisposingoftonercartridges,
place them in a bag to prevent toner from
spattering, and dispose of them as unburnable
garbage.
Note:
Take care when replacing the toner cartridge
because some toner may spill out of the toner
cartridge opening. Also, some toner may stick
to the toner cartridge, so be careful not to get
toner on your clothes.
Figure 1-533
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5) Set the new toner cartridge.
• Gently insert it into the copier as far as it will
go.
• Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted
all the way into the copier.
Figure 1-536
8) Securely close the front door.
• You cannot close the front door until the main
unit is closed.
• Youcannotoperatethecopierifthefrontdoor
is open.
Figure 1-534
6) Pull the toner cartridge sealing tape off.
• Pressingdownonthetonercartridge, gripthe
orange sealing tape tab and pull the sealing
tape straight out of the cartridge.
• Pullthetonercartridgesealingtapeoffstraight.
Caution:
Some toner may stick to the toner cartridge
seal, so be careful not to get toner on your
clothes.
Figure 1-537
Sealing tape
Figure 1-535
7) Grip the toner cartridge handle. Turn the car-
tridgecounter-clockwiseuntilitlocksintoplace.
Note:
Be sure to turn the cartridge until it locks into
place. If it does not lock into place, toner may
spill out.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B. Cleaning the Static Charge
Eliminator
1) Open the front door.
• Remove any originals that have been placed
on top of the copier so that they do not fall off
when you open the main unit.
2) Lift the green lever on the left side to open the
top of the main unit.
3) With two fingers, grip the finger grip located on
the front part of the static charge eliminator.
Liftandpulloutthestaticchargeeliminatorfrom
the copier.
Figure1-540
5) With two fingers grip the finger grip of the static
charge eliminator.
Insert the static charge eliminator back into the
copier until you hear a click.
Note:
Do not touch the purple coloured surface of the
drum; doing so will adversely affect the copy
quality.
Note:
Becarefulnottotouchthepurple-coloredsurface
on the drum of the main unit as doing so will
prevent clear copies from being made.
Drum
Figure1-538
Figure1-541
4) Usingthestaticchargeeliminatorcleaningbrush
(attached to the back side of the front door),
sweep clean the slot on the static charge
eliminator.
6) Securely close the top of the main unit.
• You cannot close the front door until the main
unit is closed.
7) Securely close the front door.
• If the Sorter or Stapler Sorter (options) is
attached, after closing the main unit, return it
to its original position.
• The static charge eliminator cleaning brush is
very small and easy to lose, so it is
recommended that you return it to its storage
locationonthebacksideofthefrontdoorafter
you have finished cleaning the slot on the
static charge eliminator.
• You cannot operate the copier if the front door
is open.
Cleaning brush
Figure1-539
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
VI. ROUTINE CLEANING
Clean the following parts once a week or when-
ever copies appear dirty.
Warning:
1. When cleaning the copier, first turn OFF the
power switch and unplug the power plug.
Failure to observe these items may result in
fire or electrical shock.
2. Clean the copier using a firmly wrung-out
cloth dampened with a mild cleansing
detergent. Do not use alcohol, benzene,
paint thinner, or other inflammable
substances. If inflammable substances
come into contact with a high-voltage area
inside the copier, it may result in fire or
electrical shock.
1. Platen glass
• Clean the platen glass with a cloth dampened
with water or a mild cleaning agent. Then,
wipe with a dry cloth.
2. Underside of the platen glass cover
• Clean the underside of the platen glass cover
with a cloth dampened with water or a mild
cleaning agent. Then, wipe with a dry cloth.
3. Bottom of the ADF/RDF (Accessory)
• Move the feeding belt with your hand as you
wipe it with a cloth dampened with water or a
mild cleaning agent. Then, wipe with a dry
cloth.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1–34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 2
COPYING PROCESS
G. Step 5 (transfer) .................................. 2-5
I. IMAGE FORMATION ................................ 2-1
A. Outline ................................................. 2-1
B. Latent Static Image Formation Block .. 2-2
C. Step 1 (pre-exposure) ......................... 2-3
D. Step 2 (primary charging) .................... 2-3
E. Step 3 (image exposure) ..................... 2-4
F. Step 4 (development) .......................... 2-4
H. Step 6 (separation) .............................. 2-6
I. Step 7 (fixing) ...................................... 2-7
J. Step 8 (drum cleaning) ........................ 2-7
II. AUXILIARY PROCESS ............................. 2-8
A. Blank Exposure ................................... 2-8
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYING PROCESS
I. IMAGE FORMATION
A. Outline
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Lens
Primary corona roller
Pre-exposure lamp
Cleanig roller
Fixing roller
Developing cylinder
Cleaning assembly
Copy paper
Transfer roller
Static eliminator
Pressure roller
Copy paper
Figure 2-101
Static latent image formation block
Primary
Image exposure
Pre-exposure
Development
Drum
Transfer
Manual feeding
Delivery
Separation
Registration
Cassette
Fixing
flow of copy paper
rotation of drum
Figure 2-102
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYING PROCESS
The copier forms images through the following
steps, and each of the steps functions as described
below.
B. Latent Static Image
Formation Block
The block consists of three steps; at the end of
the block, areas of the drum corresponding to the
black areas of the original are left with negative
chargesandtheareasofthedrumcorrespondingto
the white areas of the original are rid of negative
charges.
The images formed on the drum by the pres-
ence and absence of negative charges are not
visible to the human eye and, therefore, the term
latent static images.
step 1
step 2
step 3
step 4
step 5
step 6
step 7
step 8
pre-exposure
primary charging (negative DC)
image exposure
development (AC and negative DC bias)
transfer (negative DC)
separation (curvature + static eliminator)
fixing
drum cleaning
The photosensitive drum consists of a
photoconducting layer on the outside and an alumi-
num base on the inside; the photoconducting layer
is made of organic photoconductor (OPC), and the
aluminum conductor is a photoconductor.
Time (t)
Light area
-500
Photo conducting layer
Base
Primary
Dark area
corona
charg
Pre-ex
posure
(step1)
ing
Figure 2-103
Image exposure
(step 3)
-1000
(step 2)
Figure 2-104
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2–2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYING PROCESS
C. Step 1 (pre-exposure)
D. Step 2 (primary charging)
Pre-exposure lamp
Primary charging roller
Figure 2-105
Figure 2-106
Before primary charging takes place, the light of
the pre-exposure lamp is directed to the photosen-
sitive drum to eliminate the residual charges on the
drum, thereby preventing uneven density.
The copier uses what is termed primary charg-
ing, in which a charging roller made of conducting
material directly charges the photosensitive drum.
Compared to the conventional corona charging
method, direct charging provides such advantages
as a low application voltage and virtual absence of
ozone.
The primary charging roller is a special roller
and possesses different characteristics from the
transfer roller.
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYING PROCESS
F. Step 4 (development)
E. Step 3 (image exposure)
Toner
Blade
Optical image
Cylinder
Magnet
Developing
cylinder
Dark
Light area
Figure 2-108
Figure 2-107
As shown in Figure 2-108, the developing as-
sembly consists of a fixed magnet, a cylinder that
rotates around the magnet, and a rubber blade.
The toner is a one-component toner whose
main ingredient is magnetic resins.
In this step, the optical image of an original is
projected on the photosensitive drum to neutralize
the charges in the light areas.
The toner has insulating characteristics and
becomes positively charged by friction against the
rubber blade, which remains in contact under pres-
sure with the cylinder; the toner is evened out to
form a thin layer on the cylinder owing to the
elasticity of the rubber.
Blade
Toner
Magnet
Magnet
Figure 2-109
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2–4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYING PROCESS
An AC bias and DC bias (negative component)
are applied simultaneously* to the developing cylin-
der and the blade.
G. Step 5 (transfer)
* Termed development bias, whose negative com-
ponent is larger than that of the positive compo-
nent.
Positive
component
0V
Transfer
guide plates
Transfer
roller
Negative
component
DC bias
Figure 2-110
During copying operation, the drum surface
potential and development bias (at time of positive
component) draw toner to the photosensitive drum
to turn the latent static image into a visible image.
The excess toner is drawn away from the photosen-
sitivedrumbytheworkofthedrumsurfacepotential
andthedevelopingbias(attimeofnegativecompo-
nent).
The AC bias (frequency, in particular) mainly
affects gradation; a lower frequency improves the
gradation, but tends to result in fogging. The DC
bias relates to copy density and fogging; a higher
bias, that is closer to 0 V, darkens the image but in
turn could lead to fogging.
Figure 2-111
The transfer roller deposits negative charges
on the back of copy paper to attract toner from the
drum surface to the copy paper.
The copier uses a roller transfer method, which
requires a lower transfer voltage compared to co-
rona transfer methods and generates virtually no
ozone.
To prevent transfer failure or soiling of the back
of copy paper, the transfer guide is grounded
through a varistor.
Reference:
If the transfer guide was grounded, the charges
that should be on the back of copy paper would
escape, causing transfer failure; by the same
token, if the transfer guide is not grounded at
all, it would become charged and soiled with
deposits of toner, soiling the back of copy
paper.
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYING PROCESS
Reference:
H. Step 6 (separation)
If the image on the photosensitive drum fails to
transfer to copy paper because of a jam or the
like, the transfer charging roller could become
soiled with toner.
To prevent such a problem, the copier uses a
positive transfer voltage when the scanner is
movinginreverseorduringpostrotation,thereby
returning the positively charged toner on the
transfer roller to the photosensitive drum.
Transfer roller
Static eliminator
Transfer roller
Figure 2-113
Thecopierusesacurvatureseparationmethod,
which separates copy paper from the photosensi-
tive drum by the rigidity of the paper. However, thin
paper could at times fail to separate from the drum
because of its low rigidity. To prevent such a prob-
lem, a positive charge is applied to the separation
static eliminator, thereby weakening the static
attraction for better separation.
Figure 2-112
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2–6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYING PROCESS
I. Step 7 (fixing)
J. Step 8 (drum cleaning)
Oil application roller
Cleaning blade
Upper fixing roller
Tungsten-halogen
heater (900W)
Toner
Blade
Scoop-up sheet
Copy paper
Figure 2-115
Lower fixing roller
In this step, the cleaning blade scrapes off the
tonerremainingonthephotosensitivedruminprepa-
rationforthenextcopyrun. Thetonerisgatheredby
the scoop-up sheet and collected at the rear by a
blade.
Figure 2-114
In this step, the copy paper is pressed between
two heated rollers to make the toner image
permanent.
Topreventthecopypaperfromwrappingaround
the roller and toner offsetting (adhesion of toner to
the roller and transfer of the toner to the next copy),
the surface of the upper fixing roller is cleaned with
the cleaning roller.
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYING PROCESS
II. AUXILIARY PROCESS
A. Blank Exposure
Blank exposure is executed to remove the drum
surface potential of the non-image area that occurs
as a result of the difference among copy sizes or
when making copies in Reduce mode.
The light from the pre-exposure lamp is re-
flected by the reflecting plate and directed to the
photosensitive drum.
The non-image area between sheets of copy
paper is created by reflecting the light from the pre-
exposure lamp by a separate reflecting plate,
exposing the whole area.
Reflecting
plates
Pre-exposure lamp
Blank exposure
light path
No. 6 mirror
Shutter
Reflecting plate
Blank exposure light path
(for area between sheets)
Pre-exposure
light path
Photosensitive drum
Figure 2-201
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2–8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 3
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Inoutlinediagrams,
signal paths.
representsmechanicaldrivepaths, and
indicateselectrical
Signals in digital circuits are identified as ‘1’ for High and ‘0’ for Low. The voltage of signals,
however, depends on the circuit.
Nearly all operations of the product are controlled by a microprocessor; the internal workings
of the processor are not relevant to the service person’s work and, therefore, are left out of the
discussions. By the same token, no repairs are prescribed for the PCBs at the user’s premises; for
this reason, PCBs are discussed by means of block diagrams rather than circuit diagrams.
Forthepurposeofexplanation, discussionsaredividedintothefollowing:fromsensorstomain
PCB input ports; from main output ports to loads; and minor control circuits and functions.
I. BASIC OPERATIONS ............................... 3-1
A. Functional Construction....................... 3-1
B. Outline of Electrical Circuitry ............... 3-2
C. Inputs to the DC Controller .................. 3-3
D. Outputs from the DC Controller........... 3-8
E. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette
Feeding Module-B2 Driver PCB ........ 3-13
F. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette
Feeding Module-A2 Driver PCB ........ 3-14
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette
Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB ............. 3-16
H. Main Motor Control Circuit................. 3-21
I. Basic Sequence of Operations
C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp ......... 3-37
D. Controlling the Primary Charging
Roller ................................................. 3-38
E. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias .... 3-41
F. Controlling the Static Eliminator
Bias.................................................... 3-44
G. Controlling the Developing Bias ........ 3-46
H. Copy Density Automatic Control ....... 3-48
I. Developing/Cleaning Assembly ........ 3-50
J. Blank Exposure Control..................... 3-53
K. Primary Charging Roller Cleaning
Control ............................................... 3-55
L. Transfer Roller Locking/Releasing
(2 copies, continuous, AE) ................ 3-22
J. Original Size Detecton Control .......... 3-23
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM ............................. 3-27
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio ........ 3-27
B. Lens Drive System ............................ 3-27
C. Scanner Drive System....................... 3-31
D. Operations of the Scanner in Page
Separation Mode ............................... 3-34
III. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM .............. 3-35
A. Outline ............................................... 3-35
B. Sequence of Operations
Control ............................................... 3-56
IV. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ................. 3-57
A. Pick-Up from the Machine ................. 3-57
B. Making Two-Sided Copies (1copy) ... 3-61
C. Duplexing Unit ................................... 3-63
D. Pick-Up from the Cassette Feeding
Module-A2 ......................................... 3-72
E. Pick-Up from the Cassette Feeding
Unit-K1............................................... 3-74
F. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ................... 3-76
G. Multifeeder ......................................... 3-82
H. Identifying the Size of the Cassette... 3-85
(image formation system) .................. 3-36
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I. Fixing/Delivery Assembly .................. 3-87
J. Detecting Jams.................................. 3-92
V. POWER SUPPLY .................................. 3-101
A. Outline of Power Distribution........... 3-101
B. Power Supply Circuitry .................... 3-102
C. Detecting Errors on the Power Supply
PCB ................................................. 3-103
D. Protection Mechanisms for the Power
Supply Circuit .................................. 3-104
VI. SERVICE MODE ................................... 3-105
A. Outline ............................................. 3-105
B. Using Service Mode ........................ 3-105
C. Control Display Mode (‘1’) ............... 3-107
D. I/O Mode (‘2’) ................................... 3-110
E. Adjustment Mode (‘3’) ..................... 3-114
F. Operation/Inspection Mode (‘4’) ...... 3-117
G. Machine Settings Mode (‘5’)............ 3-118
H. Counter Mode (‘6’)........................... 3-120
VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS................................. 3-121
A. Copier Self Diagnosis ...................... 3-121
B. Self Diagnosis on the Cassette Feeding
Unit .................................................. 3-124
C. RDF/ADF Self Diagnosis ................. 3-125
D. Sorter Self Diagnosis....................... 3-126
VIII.STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS .... 3-127
A. Electrical .......................................... 3-127
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
I. BASIC OPERATIONS
A. Functional Construction
The machine can be divided into four functional blocks: pick-up/feeding system, exposure system, image
formation system, and control system.
Control system
Control panel
Copyboard
Exposure system
Illuminating
assembly
Optical
path
Control circuit
assembly
Image formation
system
Primary corona
assembly
Drum
cleaning
assembly
Photosensitive
drum
Developing
assembly
Fixing
assembly
Separation
Transfer
Tray
Manual feeding
assembly
Pick-up
control
assembly
Feeding
assembly
Duplexing
unit
Cassette 1
Pick-up/feeding
system 1
Cassette 2
Cassette
Unit
Pick-up/feeding
system 3 (accessory)
Cassette
Unit
Cassette
Unit
Flow of high voltage/toner
Flow of paper
Flow of light
Flow of electrical signals
Figure 3-101
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
its pre-programmed instructions and sends signals
to drive such loads as motors, solenoids, and lamps
as necessary.
B. Outline of Electrical Cir-
cuitry
The machine’s microprocessor is capable of
reading analog signals as well as digital signals
using its A/D converter.
The machine’s most electrical mechanisms are
controlledbythemicroprocessoronitsDCcontroller
PCB. The microprocessor reads the input signals
from the sensors and operation keys according to
Fixing roller
DC controller PCB
heater
Heater driver PCB
RDF (accessory)
Sorter (accessory)
Composite power supply
CPU
+5V
+24V
+34V
Q301
CPU
Scanning lamp
Sensor
Toner level
detection
High-
voltage
circuit
Q307
ROM
Developing cylinder
Bias PCB
HV
AE sensor PCB
Transfer charging
Static eliminator
Primary charging
Q308
RAM
Main thermistor
Sub thermistor
Main motor
driver PCB
M1
Main motor
Pre-exposure lamp
LA
Scanner motor
Lens motor
Duplexing motor
Motor
Fan
SL
Q311
IPC
Control panel
Heat exhaust fan, Feeding fan,Scanner cooling fan
Change solenoid
Multifeeder holding plate solenoid
Blanking shutter solenoid
Primary charging roller cleaning solenoid
Transfer charging roller release solenoid
Duplexing change solenoid
Registration clutch
Duplexing registration clutch
Pick-up clutch 1, 2
CL
Multifeeder pick-up clutch
Control card (accessory)
Sensor
(accessory)
Cassette unit motor
Paper deck motor
Motor
CL
Cassette driver PCB/
Paper deck driver PCB
Cassette pick-up clutch
Deck pick-up clutch
Figure 3-102
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
C. Inputs to the DC Controller
1. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (1/5)
DC controller PCB
5V
J 315B- 3
- 4
- 5
Scanner home
position sensor
SCHP
When the scanner is at home position, '1'.
(when the light-blocking plate is at PS1, '1')
PS 1
PS 2
PS 3
5V
J 310A- 3
- 2
- 1
Lens home
position sensor
When the home position sensor detects lens, '1'.
(when the light-blocking plate is at PS2, '1')
LHP
5V
J 315A- 6
- 5
- 4
Blanking shutter
home position
sensor
BSHP
When the home position sensor detects the
blanking shutter, '1'.
(when the light-blocking plate is at PS3, '1')
5V
J 309- 7
- 8
Cassette 1 paper
sensor
CPD1* When paper is present in the cassette, '0'.
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS4, '0')
- 9
PS 4
PS 5
PS 6
PS 7
PS 8
PS 10
5V
J 316- 11
- 10
Multifeeder paper
sensor
MFPD* When paper is present in the multifeeder assembly, '0'.
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS5, '0')
- 9
5V
J 316- 12
- 13
Registration
sensor
RPD
When PS6 detects paper, '1'.
- 14
(when the light blocking-plate is at PS6, '1')
5V
J 316- 5
- 4
Separation
sensor
When PS7 detects paper, '0'.
SPD*
- 3
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS 7, '0')
5V
J 309- 15
- 14
Delivery sensor
DPD*
When PS8 does not detect paper, '0'.
- 13
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS8, '0')
5V
J 309- 10
- 12
Right door sensor
RDOP* When the right door opens, '0'.
- 11
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS10, '0')
Figure 3-103
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Inputs to the DC Controller (2/5)
DC controller
5V
J 310A- 12
- 11
- 10
Copyboard cover
sensor
CVOP
When the copyboard cover is open, '1'.
(when the light-blocking plate is at PS24)
PS 11
5V
J 309- 6
- 5
Vertical path roller 2
paper sensor
When PS12 detects paper, '1'.
VP2P
PS 12
PS 13
PS 14
PS 15
PS 16
- 4
5V
J 309- 1
- 3
Cassette 2 paper
sensor
CPD2*
When paper is present in the cassette, '0'.
(when the light-blocking plate is not at PS13, '0').
- 2
5V
J 325- 3
- 2
Duplexing unit outlet
paper sensor
DUEX
When paper is present at the duplexing unit outlet, '1'.
- 1
5V
J 320- 1
- 2
Duplexing unit inlet
paper sensor
DUIN
When paper is present at the duplexing unit inlet, '1'.
- 3
5V
J 314- 12
- 13
Vertical path roller 1
paper sensor
VP1P
When paper is present at the vertical
path roller 1 sensor, '1'.
- 14
Figure 3-104
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Inputs to the DC controller (3/5)
DC controller
J 310B- 8
- 7
- 9
Original size sensor 2
SIZE2
Varies according to paper size.
PS 21
5V
J 310B- 2
- 1
- 3
SIZE1
Varies according to paper size.
Original size sensor 1
PS 23
Figure 3-105
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
4. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (4/5)
DC controller PCB
+24V
J 601
- 1
J 310A
- 9
- 8
- 7
- 6
- 2
AE
- 3
AE sensor
(1/2)
AEREF
- 4
See p. 3-48.
J 651
- 6
J 318
- 1
CS
- 5
- 2
CSZ1
CSZ2
CSZ3
CSZ4
- 4
- 3
Cassette size
sensor 1
- 3
- 4
See p. 3-85.
- 2
- 5
- 1
- 6
J 801
J 802
J 803
Control panel
J 305
J 306
Keys and LEDs are wired in the form of
a matrix on the control panel PCB, and
the DC controller turns on the LEDs and
reads key inputs.
J 316B
- 6
5V
- 7
Detects the width of the copy
paper stacked in the multifeeder.
MFPWD
VR1
- 8
J 324A
- 1
TH1
Main thermistor
(TH1)
-2
J 324A
- 5
See p. 3-87.
TH2
Sub thermistor
(TH2)
-6
J 651
- 6
J 318
- 7
CS
- 5
- 8
CSZ1
CSZ2
CSZ3
CSZ4
- 4
- 9
Cassette size
sensor 2
- 3
- 10
- 11
- 12
See p. 3-85.
- 2
- 1
Figure 3-106
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
5. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (5/5)
Service switch PCB
Service switch
DC controller PCB
When the switch turns on, '0'.
(starts service mode)
SRSW
SW850
Density correction volume
VR850
+5V
J306-7
-8
CDC
Adjusts the developing DC bias
-9
AE sensor
adjustment volume
VR851
AE sensor (2/2)
Figure 3-107
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
D. Outputs from the DC Controller
1. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (1/5)
Main switch
ON
DC controller PCB
Door switch
Cassette heater (H4)
Drum heater (H3)
Cassette heater (H5)
Composite power
supply PCB
+5V
Anti-condensation
switch (SW1)
RL101
When '0' RL101 turns ON.
(ON when the power is OFF)
EHTRL*
Lens heater (R1)
Lens heater (R2)
When RL101 is ON and SW1
is ON, the heater (R1, R2)
turns ON.
24V
When '0', RL103 turns ON.
(ON when the power is ON)
Fuse (FU1)
RL103
ACOFF
J319
–4
+5V
Fixing heater
(H1)
–1
B
–2
HTON* When the heater is ON, '0'.
Fixing
A
heater
–3
A
driver
B
HTRD
See p. 3-89.
Fluorescent heater
switch (SW2)
Fluorescent lamp
heater (H2)
Fluorescent lamp
(LA1)
Scanning
lamp control
circuit
Communicates with the composite
power supply PCB.
Microprocessor
Primary charging roller
Developing cylinder
Transfer roller
High-voltage
circuit
Static eliminator
Toner level
detection
sensor
When '0', "ADD TONER"
TEP*
is indicated.
Antenna Sensor
Figure 3-108
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (2/5)
DC controller PCB
+24V
J312A- 5
- 6
Registration
clutch
When '0', the registration clutch turns ON.
(registration roller rotates)
CL1
CL2
CL3
CL4
CL5
CL6
RGCLD*
+24V
J312A- 3
- 4
Cassette 1
pick-up clutch
When '0', the pick-up clutch turns ON.
(pick-up roller rotates)
PUCLD1*
+24V
J312A- 1
- 2
Multifeeder
pick-up clutch
When '0', the pick-up clutch turns ON.
(multifeeder pick-up roller rotates)
MFPUCLD*
+24V
J312B- 9
- 10
Duplexing unit
outlet clutch
When '0', the duplexing unit outlet
clutch (CL4) turns ON.
CL4D*
+24V
J312B- 5
- 6
Cassette 2
pick-up clutch
When '0', the cassette 2 pick-up
clutch (CL5) turns ON.
CL5D*
+24V
J312B- 3
- 4
When '0', the Slip roller clutch (CL6) turns ON.
Slip roller clutch
CL6D*
+5V
+36V
J501 J206
- 1
- 2
- 1
- 2
Main motor
J502
- 4
J312A
- 10
- 7
M1
See p. 3-21.
- 1
MLOCK*
MMD
- 2
- 8
Main motor
drive PCB
- 3
- 9
J302
J324B
J324A
Scanner motor
Lens motor
See p. 3-33.
See p. 3-29.
M2
M3
Figure 3-109
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (3/5)
DC controller PCB
J326- 1
COM A
- 2
- 3
- 4
- 5
- 6
COM B
While M5 is rotating, alternates
between '1' and '0.
(pulse signal)
A
Duplexing
unit motor
M5
A*
B
B*
Figure 3-110
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
4. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (4/5)
DC controller PCB
+24V
When '1', the solenoid turns OFF.
(blanking shutter width control)
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.
(lens mount moved)
J324B- 7
- 8
Change solenoid
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
SL 8
CHSLD*
+24V
J312B- 7
- 8
Multifeeder holding
plate solenoid
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.
(holding plate released)
MFSLD*
+24V
J315A- 8
- 7
Blanking shutter
solenoid
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.
(blanking shutter opened)
BSSLD*
+24V
J324A- 8
- 7
Primary charging roller
cleaning solenoid
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.
(cleaning pad locked)
PCLSLD*
+24V
J316- 2
- 1
Transfer charging roller
releasing solenoid
When '0', the solenoid turns ON.
(transfer roller lowered)
TRSLD*
24V
J324B- 3
- 4
When '0', the oil application
solenoid (SL6) turns ON.
(sensor drive)
Oil application solenoid
SL6D*
24V
J320- 5
- 4
Paper deflecting
plate solenoid
When '0', the paper deflecting plate
solenoid (SL8) turns ON.
SL8D*
(duplexing unit inlet opened)
Figure 3-111
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
5. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (5/5)
DC controller PCB
+24V
J 310A- 4
Scanner cooling fan
When '0', the Scanner cooling fan turns ON.
(Scanner cooling fan rotates)
- 5
(FM2)
FM2D
+24V
J 315B- 2
Heat exhaust fan
When '0', the heat exhaust fan turns ON.
(heat exhaust fan rotates)
- 1
(FM1)
HEFD*
+24V
J 314A- 7
Feeding fan
When '0', the feeding fan turns ON.
(feeding fan rotates)
- 8
(FM4)
FDFD*
+24V
J307
J12-4
-3
Power supply
cooling fan
(FM3)
Composite power
supply PCB
When '1', the power supply cooling fan turns ON.
PSCFD
-2
+24V
J 401
- 1
J 315A
- 10
Pre-exposure
lamp
When '0', the pre-exposure lamp
turns ON.
- 2
- 9
PEXP*
+24V
J 315B
- 9
When changes from '0' to '0', the
count is incremented.
Total copy counter
- 8
TCNTD*
+5V
J 306A- 11
- 13
CCD*
When '0', the count is incremented.
When '0', the control card is present.
- 12
Control Card N
CCDT*
- 10
5V
J 311A- 7
- 8
Remote
Diagnostic
Device II
- 6
- 5
- 4
When '0', a copy is counted.
AST-CNTP*
AST-TXD
AST-RXD
Transmission data (IPC communication)
Reception data (IPC communication)
24V
- 2
- 3
Figure 3-112
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
E. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-B2
Driver PCB
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-B2 Driver PCB (1/1)
DC controller PCB
Cassette driver PCB
5V
J 110- 1
- 3
Cassette 3
vertical path
sensor
When PS1 detects paper, '1'.
(when the light-blocking plate
is at PS1cu, '1')
C3VPD
PS1cu
- 2
5V
J 110- 4
- 6
Cassette 3
paper sensor
When paper is present in the
cassette, '0'.
(when the light-blocking plate
is not at PS2cu, '0')
C3PD
PS2cu
- 5
J 651
- 6
J 110
- 7
CS2
- 5
- 8
C2SZ1
C2SZ2
C2SZ3
C2SZ4
- 4
- 9
Cassette 3
size detection
- 3
- 10
- 11
- 12
See p. 3-85.
- 2
- 1
+24V
J 115- 1
- 2
Cassette 3
pick-up clutch
When '0', the pick-up clutch turns ON.
(pick-up roller rotates)
CL1cu
RGCLD*
+24V
J 114- 1
- 2
CMA
While M1cu is rotating, alternates
- 3
+24V
CMA*
between '1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
Cassette
unit motor
- 4
M1cu
- 5
CMB
- 6
CMB*
Figure 3-113
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
F. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-A2
Driver PCB
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-A2 Driver PCB (1/2)
DC controller PCB
Cassette driver PCB
5V
J 110- 1
- 3
Cassette 3
vertical path
sensor
When PS1cu detects paper, '1'.
(when the light-blocking plate is
at PS1cu, '1')
C3VPD
PS1cu
- 2
5V
J 110- 4
- 5
Cassette 3
paper sensor
When paper is present in the cassette, '0'.
(when the light-blocking plate is not
at PS2cu, '0')
C3PD*
PS2cu
PS3cu
- 6
5V
J 120- 13
- 15
Cassette 4
vertical path
sensor
When PS3cu detects paper, '1'.
(when the light-blocking plate is
at PS3cu, '1')
C4VPD
- 14
5V
J 120- 10
- 12
Cassette 4
paper sensor
When paper is present in the cassette, '0'.
(when the light-blocking pale is not
at PS4cu, '0')
CS4PD*
PS4cu
PS5cu
- 11
5V
J 120- 1
- 3
Cassette right
door sensor
When the right door is open, '0'.
(when the light-blocking plate is not
at PS5cu, '0')
CRDOP*
- 2
J 651
- 6
J 110
- 7
CS3
- 5
- 8
C3SZ1
C3SZ2
C3SZ3
C3SZ4
- 4
- 9
Cassette 3
size detection
- 3
- 10
- 11
- 12
See p. 3-85.
- 2
- 1
J 651
- 6
J 120
- 4
CS4
- 5
- 5
C4SZ1
C4SZ2
C4SZ3
C4SZ4
- 4
- 6
Cassette 4
size detection
- 3
- 7
See p. 3-85.
- 2
- 8
- 1
- 9
Figure 3-114
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Module-A2 Driver PCB (2/2)
DC controller PCB
Cassette driver PCB
+24V
When '0', the pick-up clutch
turns ON.
(pick-up roller rotates)
J 125- 1
- 2
Cassette 3
pick-up clutch
CL1cu
CL2cu
C3PUCLD*
+24V
When '0', the pick-up clutch
turns ON.
(pick-up roller rotates)
J 125- 3
- 4
Cassette 4
pick-up clutch
C4PUCLD*
+24V
J 114- 1
- 2
CMA
While M1cu is rotating,
- 3
+24V
CMA*
alternates between '1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
Cassette
unit motor
- 4
M1cu
- 5
CMB
- 6
CMB*
Figure 3-115
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Unit-K1
Driver PCB
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB (1/3)
DC controller PCB
Cassette feeding unit driver PCB
5V
J 110- 1
Cassette 3 vertical
path detection
- 3
- 2
When '1', paper is present at the sensor.
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)
C3VPD
PS1cu
5V
J 110- 4
- 6
Cassette 3 paper
detection
When paper is present in the cassette, '1'.
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)
C3PD*
PS2cu
PS3cu
- 5
5V
J 120- 13
- 15
Cassette 4 vertical
path detection
When '1', paper is present at the sensor.
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)
C4VPD
- 14
5V
J 120- 10
- 12
Cassette 4 paper
detection
When paper is present in the cassette, '1'.
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)
C4/5PD
PS4cu
- 11
5V
J 120- 1
- 3
When the right door is open, '1'.
(the light-blocking plate is not at the sensor)
CRDOP*
5V
Right door detection
PS5cu
PS6cu
- 2
J 130- 1
- 3
Cassette 5 vertical
path detection
When '1', paper is present at the sensor.
(the light-blocking plate is at the sensor)
C5VPD
- 2
J 130- 4
- 6
Cassette 5 paper
detection
PS7cu
- 5
Figure 3-116
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB (2/3)
Cassette feeding unit driver PCB
DC controller PCB
J 218
- 6
J 110
- 7
- 8
CS3
- 5
C3SZ1
C3SZ2
C3SZ3
C3SZ4
- 4
- 9
Cassette 3 size
detection PCB
- 3
- 10
- 11
- 12
See p. 3-85.
- 2
- 1
J 228
- 6
J 120
- 4
CS4/CS5
- 5
- 5
C4SZ1/C5SZ1
C4SZ2/C5SZ2
C4SZ3/C5SZ3
C4SZ4/C5SZ4
- 4
- 6
Cassette 4 size
detection PCB
See p. 3-85.
- 3
- 7
- 2
- 8
- 1
- 9
J 238
- 6
J 130
- 7
- 5
- 8
- 4
- 9
Cassette 5 size
detection PCB
- 3
- 10
- 11
- 12
- 2
- 1
Figure 3-117
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 Driver PCB (3/3)
Cassette feeding unit driver PCB
DC controller PCB
24V
J135
- 1
- 2
Cassette 3
pick-up clutch
CL1cu
C3PUCLD*
24V
When '0', CL1cu turns ON.
J135
- 3
Cassette 4
pick-up clutch
- 4
CL2cu
CL3cu
C4/5PUCLD*
24V
When '0', CL2cu/CL3cu turns on.
J135
- 5
Cassette 5
pick-up clutch
- 6
J114- 1
- 2
COM A
A
- 3
While M1cu/M3cu is rotating,
alternates between '1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)
A*
- 4
Pick-up
motor 1
M1cu
COM B
- 5
B
- 6
B*
J134-1
-2
-3
-4
Pick-up
motor 2
M2cu
-5
-6
J103-6
J1-26
*When '0',
SELECT
of CL2cu/CL3cu, CL2cu is selected.
of M1cu/M2cu, M1cu is driven.
The cassette size is of cassette 4.
of PS4/PS7cu, PS4cu is detected.
*When '1',
of CL2cu/CL3cu, CL3u is selected.
of M1cu/M2cu, M1cu/M2cu is driven.
The cassette size is of cassette 5.
of PS4/PS7cu, PS7cu is detected.
*When '0', cassette 4 input/output is
selected; when '1', cassette 5
input/output is selected.
Figure 3-118
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
4. Inputs to Paper Deck-K1 Controller (1/2)
Pedestal controller PCB
5V
J 111- 6
- 5
Right door open
sensor
RDOP*
When "0", right door is open.
(light-blocking plate is not at PS5)
- 4
PS 5
PS 2
PS 1
PS 3
PS 4
PS 6
5V
J 112- 3
- 2
Deck vertical path
roller paper sensor
When PS2 detects paper, "1".
(light-blocking palate is at PS2)
DVRPD
- 1
5V
J 112- 6
- 5
DPD
When paper is present in paper desk, "1".
(light-blocking plate is at PS1)
- 4
Deck paper sensor
5V
J 112- 9
- 8
Deck lifter position
sensor
DLD
When lifter is at upper position, "1".
(when light-blocking plate is at PS3)
- 7
5V
J 113- 3
- 2
Deck lifter upper
limit sensor
DEL
When lifter reaches upper limit, "1".
(when light-blocking plate is at PS4)
- 1
5V
J 113- 10
- 7
- 8
Deck open sensor
DEOP* When "0", deck is open.
(light-blocking plate is not at PS6)
SW1
J 114- 1
- 2
SIZE 2
SIZE 1
Deck size switch
PCB
See p. 3-81.
- 3
Figure 3-119
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
5. Outputs from Paper Deck-K1 Controller (2/2)
Pedestal controller PCB
J221
- 1
J201
- 1
34V
34V
- 2
- 2
Pedestal motor
M1
J222
- 5
J109
- 1
"1" or "0" depending on the type of copier, thereby
changing revolution.
- 4
- 2
PEDMD (output) When "1", pedestal motor is ON.
- 3
- 3
LOCK (input)
When "0", pedestal motor is error.
- 2
- 4
- 1
- 5
5V
24V
J111-2
-3
Vertical path roller 3
drive clutch
CL3
CL1
CL2
CL3D*
When "0" , CL3 goes ON.
When "0" , CL1 goes ON.
24V
J113-4
-5
Deck pick-up clutch
CL1D*
24V
J113-6
-7
Deck vertical path
roller drive clutch
CL2D*
When "0" , CL2 goes ON.
When "0" , CL4 goes ON.
CL4D*
J114-4
-5
Deck lifter drive
clutch
CL4
SL1
J114-6
-7
24V
Deck pick-up roller
release solenoid
DEPRL*
When "0" , SL1 goes ON.
Figure 3-120
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Operations
H. Main Motor Control Circuit
Whenthemainmotorsignal(MMD)fromtheDC
controller circuit goes ‘1’, the motor driver drive
circuit turns ON, thereby causing the main motor
(M1) to rotate at a specific speed.
While the main motor is rotating at a specific
speed, the motor driver PCB sends the constant
speedstatussignal(MLOCK*0)totheDCcontroller
PCB. If a fluctuation occurs in the rotation of the
main motor for some reason, the MLOCK* signal
goes ‘1’.
1. Outline
Figure 3-121 shows the circuit that controls the
main motor (M1), and the circuit has the following
functions:
q Turns ON/OFF the main motor.
w Controls the main motor to a specific speed.
The main motor (M1) is a DC motor equipped
with a built-in clock pulse generator. When the
motor rotates, clock pulse signals (MMCLK*) are
generated according to the revolution of the motor.
The speed control circuit controls the main motor
(M1) to a specific speed by matching the phase of
the frequency of the reference signal with the
frequency of the clock pulses.
If MLOCK*=0 continues for about 1 sec while
the main motor drive signal (MMD) is ‘1’, the DC
controller identifies an error condition and stops the
main motor and issues ‘E010’ at the same time.
36V
J 501
- 1
J 206
Power
Supply
PCB
- 2
J 312A
- 8
J 502
- 2
MMD
Clock pulse generator
Drive circuit
DC controller
PCB
Drive
current
J 312A
- 7
J 502
- 1
MLOCK*
M1
Phase control
circuit
Main motor
Hall IC output
MMCLK
Reference signal
Main motor driver PCB
Figure 3-121
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
I. Basic Sequence of Operations (2 copies, continuous, AE)
Power switch
ON
Copy Start key
ON
WMUP WMUPR STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
AER
Main motor (M1)
Primary charging bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias
Scanning lamp
Scanner
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Figure 3-122
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Function
Remarks
Period
WMUP (Warm-
Up)
From switch on until the fixing roller
temperature reaches 165°C for the
black developer or 145°C for the CT
Unit. (about 75 seconds at an ambient
temperature of 20°C)
Allows time for fixing
roller to warm up.
Warm-up time varies
with fixing roller
temperature at power
ON. When the COPY
START key is lighting
green.
WMUPR (Warm- Until the fixing roller temperature
Keeps fixing roller
temperature uniform.
• After the WMUPR
period ends, the
READY/WAIT
indicator changes
from orange to green.
• Even when the fixing
roller has warmed up,
it rotates for at least
3.5 seconds.
Up Rotation)
reaches 175°C to 180°C for the black
developer or 155°C to 160°C for the CT
unit.
Stabilizes drum
sensitivity to prepare for
copying.
STBY (standby)
• From when LSTR ends until when
the Copy Start key is pressed or the
power switch is turned OFF.
• From when the power switch is
turned ON until the Copy Start key is
pressed.
Waits for a press on an
operation key (e.g.,
Copy Start key).
• 2 min or more after
LSTR ends, the
display on the control
panel switches to
standard mode.
INTR
(initial rotation)
For at least 1 sec after the Copy Start
key is pressed.
Stabilizes the drum
sensitivity in preparation
for copying operation.
AER
(AE rotation)
Moves the scanner
AE mode only.
forward/in reverse about
65 mm to measure the
density of the original.
SCFW
While the scanner is moving forward.
Illuminates the original
by the scanning lamp,
and the reflected optical
image is projected on
the photosensitive drum
through mirrors and
lenses.
(scanner forward) • The distance traveled forward
depends on the cassette size and the
reproduction ratio.
• The speed for forward travel
depends on the selected
reproduction ratio.
SCRV
(scanner reverse)
While the scanner is moving in reverse.
Returns the scanner to
the home position in
preparation for the next
copying operation.
The registration signal is
generated and the copy
paper is fed to the
transfer assembly.
LSTR
(last rotation)
From when SCRV ends until when the
copy paper moves past the delivery
sensor.
Removes charges from
the surface of the
photosensitive drum as
post copying
Discharges the last
copy.
processing.
Table 3-101
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
when the copyboard cover is closed and identify the
original as being any of the default paper sizes.
Each original size sensor consists of a LED and
a phototransistor: the LED illuminates the original,
and the photodiode receives the reflected light and
sends the output to the DC controller circuit.
The size of originals in the DF (option) is identi-
fied by the DF and communicated to the machine.
When the DF is used, the machine executes auto
paper selection, auto reproduction selection, re-
duction layout, and enlargement layout based on
this size data.
J. Original Size Detection
Control
1. Outline
The machine offers auto paper selection, auto
reproduction selection, reduction layout, and en-
largement layout functions, all of which require the
identification of the size of the originals being used.
To identify the size, the machine has two to four
original size sensors under its copyboard glass
which check the presence/absence of an original
Copyboard cover open/
closed sensor
PS11
A4
A3
A4R
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-123 (A configuration)
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
This method enables identification of the size of
a black original. However, the sensor output levels
will not change in the following cases:
a. A3 black original
b. book original (the thickness tends to prevent
changes in the sensor level)
2. Operations
When the copyboard cover is brought down to
about 30° or less, the copyboard cover sensor
(PS11)turnsON, i.e., thelight-blockingplateblocks
PS11.
For 15 sec after PS11 turns ON or until the Copy
Start key is pressed, the machine reads the output
level of each sensor at intervals of about 0.1 sec. If
the output level remains unchanged during the
period, the machine identifies the presence of an
original at the sensor location in question, thereby
identifying the size of the original according to the
status combinations shown in Table 3-102.
Reference:
For a. or b. above, the machine can identify the
size wrongly.
Copyboard cover
Original
15°~13°
PS11:ON
Copyboard glass
ON
OFF
Level does Level changes
not change
Original
detection 2
Original
detection 1
Figure 3-124
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Original Size Detection
The size of an original is identified with reference to the presence/absence of an original at each sensor
based on the sensor output combinations given in Table 3-102.
• Level Does Not Change
The sensor output when the copyboard cover is closed to from 15° to 30° and the sensor output 15 sec
thereafter are the same (detecting an original).
• Level Changes
The sensor output when the copyboard cover is closed to from 15° to 30° and the sensor output when
the copyboard cover is fully closed are different (not detecting an original).
Sensor level
Size
A3
1
2
Does not change Does not change
A4R
Changes
Does not change
Changes
Does not change
Changes
A4
A5
Changes
Table 3-102 (A configuration original)
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
B. Lens Drive System
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM
1. Outline
A. Varying the Reproduction
Ratio
Thelensdrivesystemisdrivenbythelensmotor
(M3), and the drive generated by the lens motor is
transmitted to the blanking shutter exposure unit
through a relay gear. (See p. 3-53.)
Tomovethelens, therelaygearisengagedwith
the lens gear by turning ON the change solenoid
(SL1). When the lens motor rotates in the direction
of the arrow in this condition, the lens moves in the
direction of enlargement ( ) because of the drive
coming through the relay lens gear and the lens
cable.
In reduction mode, the blank exposure shutter
operates according to the degree of movement of
the lens, thereby blanking out both sides of the copy
to suit the selected reduction ratio.
The machine’s scanner lens home position
sensor (PS2) is located in the middle of the scanner
lensdriverailsothatthescannerlenshomeposition
may be detected quickly at power-on, thereby
shortening the first copy time. (Additionally, a mere
pressoneachRatiobuttoncausesthescannerlens
to move to the appropriate position to shorten the
first copy time.)
The reproduction ratio in the axial direction of
the photosensitive drum is varied by the lens drive
system, and that in the peripheral direction of the
photosensitive drum is varied by the scanner drive
system.
Thelensdrivesystemusesazoomlens, andthe
reproduction ratio in the axial direction of the photo-
sensitive drum is varied by changing both the posi-
tion of the lens and the focal distance as shown in
Figure 3-201.
The scanner drive system moves the No. 1
mirror faster in relation to the peripheral speed of
the photosensitive drum (reduction) or slower
(enlargement), thereby varying the reproduction
ratiointheperipheraldirectionofthephotosensitive
drum.
DIRECT
F'
F
REDUCE
F1'
F1
ENLARGE
F2'
F2
Figure 3-201
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Lens motor (M3)
Relay gear
Change solenoid (SL1)
SL1 'ON'
(lens drive)
SL1 'OFF'
(blank exposure
unit drive)
Change solenoid (SL1)
Lens motor (M3)
Relay gear
Lens cable
Lens
Lens home
position sensor
(PS2)
Enlargement
Cam groove
DC controller
Figure 3-202
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
In this condition, the motor is kept stationary by
keeping LNSA, LNSA*, LNSB, and LNSB* all ‘0’.
2. Lens Motor Drive Circuit
The lens motor (M3) is a stepping motor and is
rotated by the drive power supply signal LNSCA/
LNSCB and pulse signals LNSA/LNSA* and LNSB/
LNSB*.
b. Lens Motor in Operation
• LNSCA=1
LNSCB=1
When the lens motor is rotating, the motor is
being driven by 34 V to move the lens.
Wheneverthelensmotorisatrest, 5Visapplied
to the motor to ensure that the lens is kept at the
appropriate position.
>
The motor driver voltage switching circuit
switches to 34 V.
>
34 V is supplied to the motor.
In this condition, the motor rotates when pulses
are applied to each phase in a specific sequence.
a. Lens Motor at Rest
• LNSCA=0
LNSCB=0
>
The motor drive voltage switching circuit
switches to 5 V.
>
5 V is supplied to keep the motor at rest.
DC controller PCB
34V
5V
J 324B- 1
- 4
LNSCB
LNSCA
Motor drive voltage
switching circuit
- 5
- 6
- 2
LNSA
LNSA*
LNSB
(Q301)
M3
- 3
LNSB*
Lens motor
Figure 3-203
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Basic Sequence of Operations for
theLensDriveSystem(enlargement/
reduction)
In enlargement/reduction mode, the lens is
always returned to home position first before being
moved to the appropriate position for the selected
reproduction ratio. This is true when the ratio is
reset to DIRECT.
Ratio change
Enlargement selected
Power switch
ON
Copy Start key
ON
S
T
B
Y
I
N
T
R
➀
➁
➀
➁
Lens motor (M3)
Change solenoid (SL1)
Enlarge Reduce
Lens
Lens home position sensor (PS2)
Figure 3-204
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
when moving the scanner forward) regardless of
the selected reproduction ratio.
C. Scanner Drive System
1. Outline
The distance traveled by the scanner varies
depending on the length of the copy paper and the
selected reproduction ratio.
Thescannerdrivesystemisdrivenbythescanner
motor(M2).Thescannermotorchangesthedirection
of its rotation, and its speed changes when moving
thescannerforwardtosuittheselectedreproduction
ratio. However, its speed when moving the scanner
in reverse remains constant (2.5 times as fast as
SCA
SCA*
SCB
SCB*
DC controller PCB
No. 1 mirror mount
Forward
Light-blocking plate
No. 2 mirror mount
Scanner home position detection signal (SCHP)
Scanner home position sensor (PS1)
Figure 3-205
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Relationship between Scanner Sensors and Signals
Scanner
Scanner sensor
Signal
SCHP
Description
Registration clutch ON
Forward
Reverse
PS1 Scanner
home position
sensor
▼
Scanner reverse OFF 0.1 sec later
▲
Table 3-201
Reference:
The timing at which the registration clutch is turned ON is determined in relation to when the Copy Start
key is pressed or when the scanner is moved forward.
3. Basic Sequence of Scanner Operations
Power switch Copy Start key
ON
ON
WMUP STBY
INTR
AER
SCFW SCRV SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
*
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Registration sensor (PS6)
Scanner
Forward Reverse
Scanning lamp
*The scanner is returned to home position at power-on whenever the scanner is not at home position.
Figure 3-206
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The scanner motor is a 4-phase control step-
ping motor and controls the scanning direction and
speedbychangingthefrequencyandthesequence
of drive pulses (SCA through SCB*).
The motor drive voltage ON/OFF switching cir-
cuit controls whether to apply power to drive the
motor or to remove power to keep the motor at rest.
The current switching control circuit determines
the current flowing into the motor according to the
revolution of the motor, and the motor driver circuit
controls the constant current according to the value
determined by the circuit.
4. Driving the Scanner Motor
a. Outline
The scanner motor is a 4-phase control step-
ping motor. It is turned ON/OFF and its direction
and the speed of its rotation are chanceged by
controlling the output timing of pulse signals SCA/
A* and SCB/B*.
b. Operations
The microprocessor (Q301) on the DC control-
ler PCB receives such information as on the se-
lected copying mode and reproduction ratio from
the control panel circuit. In response, it issues drive
pulses to the scanner motor (M2) by way of the
motor drive circuit.
DC controller PCB
(Q301)
(Q324)
A,A*,B,B*
J302
SCA
SCA*
Microprocessor
Motor driver
circuit
SCB
M2
SCB*
5V
Current
value
Current value
switching control
circuit
switching
Figure 3-207
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
D. Operations of the Scanner in Page Separation Mode
Original
leading
edge of
1st page
Original
leading
edge of
1st page
Original
leading
edge of
Original
leading
edge of
Original
leading
edge of
Original
leading
edge of
1st page 2nd page
1st page 2nd page
INTR
SCRVI
SCFW1
SCRVI
SCFW1
SCFW2
SCRV2
SCFW2
SCRV2
LSTR
I
I
II
III
II
III
Scanner home position
signal (PS1)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Scanner
Reverse
Forward
*Non-AE, page separation mode, A4, 2 copies, continuous.
Figure 3-208
I, II, and II in Figure 3-208 use the scanner home
position signal (falling edge of SCHP) for the 1st
page as the reference for control by the micropro-
cessor on the DC controller PCB.
The microprocessor determines how much the
scanner must travel forward to suit the selected
cassette size.
I, II: The distance traveled forward is determined
by the selected reproduction ratio and the
cassette size.
III:
If the forward travel distance during II of
Figure 3-208 is in excess of about 216 mm,
216 mm is used to represent the leading
edge of the second page.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
• Controls the scanning lamp.
III. IMAGE FORMATION
SYSTEM
• Controls the primary charging.
• Controls the transfer charging.
• Controls the separation static eliminator.
• Controls the developing bias.
A. Outline
• Controls the blank exposure lamp.
The machine’s image formation system con-
sists of the following:
Copyboard
Lens
Scanning lamp
Blank exposure
unit
AE sensor
Developing cylinder
Primary
charging
roller
Composite power
supply
DC controller
PCB
Static
eliminator
Scanning lamp
ON control circuit
High-voltage
circuit
Transfer
roller
Q301
Microprocessor
T1
T2
T5
Microprocessor
Figure 3-301
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
B. Sequence of Operations (image formation system)
Power switch
ON
Copy Start key
ON
WMUP WMUPR STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
AER
*1
Main motor/
Pre-exposure lamp
Primary charging
Transfer charging
Transfer cleaning
Reference bias (ATVC)
Separation static
eliminator
Developing bias AC
component
Developing bias DC
component
Figure 3-302
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The machine exerts phase control by the zero-
cross signal (ZXDP) to stabilize the light intensity.
The intensity of the scanning lamp is switched
controlled by the LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROL
command (FLS).
During AE exposure, however, the voltage (70
V) applied to the scanning lamp remains the same.
The NP6621 adjusts the copy density using its
development bias; see p. 3-26.
C. Controlling the Scanning
Lamp
1. Outline
Thescanninglamp(LA1)iscontrolledbytheDC
controller PCB; see Figure 3-303. Specifically, the
DC controller:
• Turns the scanning lamp ON and OFF.
• Controls the intensity of the scanning lamp.
c. Error Protection
The condition of the scanning lamp is monitored
using the LIGHT signal (LGHT).
2. Mechanism
a. Turning the Scanning Lamp ON and OFF
The CPU (Q308) on the DC controller PCB
controls the lamp regulator. The scanning lamp
goes ON/OFF through serial communication
interfacebetweenDCcontrollerPCBandComposite
power supply PCB.
If the LIGHT signal (LGHT) is received by the
DC controler for about 20 sec, the error detection
circuitgeneratestheACSHUTOFFsignal(ACOFF)
toforcetherelay(K1)ontheACdriverOFF, thereby
cutting AC power supply (p. 3-101). In this case,
E220 error is displayed.
b. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning
Lamp
ACOFF
J307
-2
Relay
(K1)
W15
W4
Lamp ON
detection
circuit
J307
J5
-4 LGHT
-11
Power Supply
J3
-1
Scanning
lamp
(LA1)
Intensity
switching
circuit
Phase
control
-6 FLS
-9
-2
Zero-cross
detection
circuit
Triac-
triggering
circuit
Switching
circuit
-3
-13 ZXDP
DC controller PCB
Composite power supply
Figure 3-303
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The main transformer (T1) generates the pri-
mary voltage controlled by U402.
D. Controlling the Primary
Charging Roller
1. Outline
Figure 3-304 shows the circuit that controls the
application voltage of the primary charging roller,
and the circuit has the following functions:
• Turns ON/OFF the primary charging roller bias.
• Controls the primary charging roller bias to a
constant voltage.
• Switches the application voltage level of the
primary charging roller bias.
• Controls the application voltage of the primary
charging roller bias.
• Corrects the scanning lamp ON voltage level.
Composite power supply PCB
Main transformer
Primary charging roller
24V
T1
Filter circuit
Rectifier circuit
T4
Voltage
detection
circuit
Photosensitive drum
PCTRLS
Microprocessor
U402
Current
detection
circuit
PCURS
DC controller PCB
Q301 (master)
Microprocessor
Figure 3-304
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Turning ON/OFF the Primary Charg-
ing Roller Bias
5. AutomaticCorrectionoftheApplica-
tion Voltage Level of the Primary
Charging Roller Bias and the Scan-
ning Lamp ON Voltage Level (APVC,
ALVC control)
Changes in latent static images can affect the
copy quality; such changes in latent static images
result from
Under the control of the microprocessor master
(Q301) on the DC controller PCB, the micro-pro-
cessor on the composite power supply PCB gener-
atesthePCTRLSsignal(pulsesignal),whichcauses
the secondary side of the transformer (T4) to go ON
and the primary charging roller bias to be applied.
• changes in the drum sensitivity, and
• changes in the charges from the primary
charging roller.
3. Controlling the Primary Charging
Roller Bias to a Constant Voltage
The microprocessor on the composite power
supply PCB reads the PDCS signal (analog signal)
from the voltage detection circuit while the bias
voltage is being applied to the primary charging
roller and controls the PDCPWM signal so that the
output voltage remains constant.
Ontheotherhand,thesechangesoccurbecause
of the site of installation (temperature, humidity),
deterioration of related parts, wear, or dirt.
The machine’s light area potential (VL) and dark
area potential (VD) tend to increase. To correct such
an increase, the machine corrects the application
voltage level of the primary charging roller (APVC
control)and,atthesametime,correctsthescanning
lamp ON voltage level (ALVC control), thereby
ensuring a specific degree of light area potential
(VL) and light area potential (VD) at all times.
4. Switching the Application Voltage
LevelforthePrimaryChargingRoller
Bias
The machine applies a cleaning bias to the
transfer roller during initial rotation (INTR), when
the scanner is moving in reverse (SCRV), during
last rotation, and at power-on after a jam. (See p. 3-
46.)
To improve the efficiency of cleaning by the
cleaning bias and to prevent residual memory on
the drum by the cleaning bias, the primary charging
roller bias is applied during initial rotation and while
the scanner is moving in reverse.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The sequence of this control mechanism is as
follows during initial rotation after the power switch
is turned ON:
Caution:
You must enter the APVC value indicated on
the label attached to the composite power
supply PCB whenever you have replaced the
composite power supply PCB in service mode
No. 315 and No. 316. (See the Service
Handbook.)
• Flow
A specific voltage (about -1.46 kV) is applied
to the primary charging roller for about 1.5
sec.
Caution:
You must enter the APVC correction voltage
value as indicated on the label attached to the
front of the drum unit whenever you have
replaced the drum unit. (See the Service
Handbook.)
The current value at this time is checked by
the current detection circuit, and the result is
sent to the microprocessor.
In response, the microprocessor forwards
the result to the microprocessor (Q301) on
the DC controller, which determines the pri-
mary charging roller bias application voltage
based on the result.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
To remove such a build-up of toner, a positive
voltage (constant, DC) is applied, thereby returning
thetonerfromthetransferrollertothephotosensitive
drum. The bias is applied as follows:
• during initial rotation after the Copy Start key
is pressed.
E. Controlling the Transfer
Roller Bias
1. Outline
The machine uses a direct transfer method that
uses a roller; and, for this reason, it executes bias
control in a way different from copiers that rely on
corona charging.
The transfer roller bias may be any of three
types and has the following function and output
timing:
• part of the period in which the scanner is
moving in reverse.
• part of last rotation.
c. Reference Bias (ATVC)
Changes in the environment or deterioration in
the transfer roller can affect the resistance of the
transfer roller, possibly affecting the transfer
efficiency.
To suppress the changes in the image quality
caused by changes in the transfer efficiency, the
machine corrects the application voltage level of
the transfer bias.
The transfer ATVC bias (constant current, -190
µA DC) is a bias applied each time the Copy Start
keyispressedsothattheaforementionedcorrection
value may be determined.
a. Transfer Bias
This bias corresponds to the transfer bias of
copiers that rely on corona charging. (constant
voltage of -3.5 kV to -6.0 kV DC)
b. Cleaning Bias
Sincethemachineusesadirecttransfermethod,
toner from the photosensitive drum can accumulate
on the transfer roller because of jams.
Copy Start key
ON
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M1)
Transfer bias
Cleaning bias (+)
Reference bias (ATVC)
Static eliminator bias
Figure 3-305
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Figure 3-306 shows the circuit that controls the
foregoing three types of biases, and the circuit has
the following functions:
• Turns ON/OFF the transfer roller bias.
• Controls the transfer bias to a constant volt-
age.
• Corrects the voltage level of the transfer bias.
Photosensitive
drum
Composite power supply PCB
24V
DC
power
supply
Transfer roller
Transfer
bias control
circuit
24V
Transformer
circuit
T5
Constant
voltage control
circuit
Current
limiter circuit
(transfer bias)
Constant
current circuit
(ATVC)
Current
limiter circuit
(cleaning)
Cleaning bias
control circuit
Microprocessor
DC controller PCB
Microprocessor (Q301)
Figure 3-306
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Turning ON/OFF the Transfer Roller
Bias
4. Correcting the Transfer Bias Voltage
Level (ATVC control)
The TFWON signal is generated under the
control of the microprocessor on the composite
power supply PCB, thereby turning ON the
secondary side of the transfer transformer (T5) and
applying a DC bias to the transfer roller.
Table 3-301 shows combinations of signals
used to determine the transfer roller bias.
To compensate for changes in the transfer
efficiency caused by changes in the environment or
deterioration of the transfer roller, the machine
automatically corrects the application voltage level
of the transfer bias.
During initial rotation after the Copy Start key is
pressed, a constant current (-10 µA) is sent to the
transferroller.Themicroprocessoronthecomposite
power supply PCB reads the transfer roller
application voltage from the constant control circuit,
and the result is sent to the microprocessor (Q301)
on the DC controller, which in turn determines the
voltage to be applied to the transfer roller.
Thiscontrolmechanismisexecutedonceduring
initial rotation after the Copy Start key is pressed;
therefore, theapplicationvoltagecanneverchange
during continuous copying.
TREVON* TFWON* TFWPWM
Transfer bias
output
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Cleaning
bias output
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Reference
bias output
(ATVC)
OFF
5. CurrentLimiterCircuit(transferbias)
If changes in the environment or the like causes
an overcurrent to flow to the secondary side of the
transformer (T5) while the transfer bias is being
generated, the current limiter circuit starts control to
make sure that no current greater than 50 µA flows.
Table 3-301
3. Controlling the Transfer Bias
Constant Voltage
6. CurrentLimiterCircuit(cleaningbias)
If changes in the environment or the like causes
an overcurrent to flow to the secondary side of the
transformer (T5) while the cleaning bias is being
generated, the current limiter circuit starts control to
make sure that no current greater than 10 µA flows.
The microprocessor on the composite power
supply PCB reads the TFWS (analog signal) from
theconstantvoltagecontrolcircuitwhilethetransfer
DC bias is being generated and changes the duty
ratiosothattheapplicationvoltageremainsconstant,
thereby controlling the TFWPWM signal.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
F. Controlling the Static Elimi-
nator Bias
1. Outline
Figure 3-307 show the circuit that controls the
staticeliminatorbias,andthecircuithasthefollowing
functions:
• Turns ON/OFF the static eliminator bias and
controls it to a constant voltage.
• Switches the static eliminator bias voltage
level.
24V
Composite power supply PCB
T4
Photosensitive
drum
Static eliminator
bias drive
circuit
Static
eliminator
Transformer
circuit
JLVCTL
JCTL
Microprocessor
J5
J307
DC controller PCB
Q301
Microprocessor
Figure 3-307
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Switching the Voltage Level of the
Static Eliminator Bias
3. Ensuring Separation of Thin Paper
In certain environments, the machine can fail to
separate thin paper.
If such is the case, you may keep the application
voltage to the static eliminator to 4.0 kV at all times
to improve separation from the drum.
Use service mode No. 506 to switch the
separation static eliminator output voltage. (See
p. 3-117.)
The microprocessor on the composite power
supply PCB generates the JCTL signal (analog
signal) under the control of the microprocessor
(Q301) on the DC controller PCB, thereby causing
the secondary side of the main transformer (T4) to
turnON;thebiasforthestaticeliminatorisgenerated
by increasing the high-voltage output from the main
transformer (T4).
The JLVCTL signal is used to switch between
output voltages 2.5 and 4.0 KV.
When the JCTL signal turns ON, the drive circuit
turns ON to generate the static eliminator bias.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
G. Controlling the Developing
Bias
1. Outline
Figure 3-308 shows the circuit that controls the
developing bias, and the circuit has the following
functions:
• Turns ON/OFF the developing bias AC
component.
• Turns ON/OFF the developing bias DC
component.
• Controls the voltage level of the developing
bias DC component.
• Controls the developing bias DC component
to a constant voltage.
Composite power supply PCB
24V
T4
Developing
DC bias drive
circuit
Developing AC bias transformer
T301
Developing
DC bias voltage
detection circuit
Photosensitive
drum
Developing AC
transformer
drive circuit
Developing
cylinder
BPWM
BIASS
Microprocessor
J5
J307
AE sensor
VR850
Q301
Microprocessor
Copy density
correction volume
Copy Density key
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-308
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
• Setting of the Copy Density key.
• Output of the AE sensor
• Setting of the copy density correction volume
(VR850)
2. TurningON/OFFtheDevelopingBias
DC Component and Controlling to
Constant Voltage
The microprocessor on the composite power
supply PCB generates the BPWM signal (pulse
signal) under the control of the microprocessor
master (Q301) on the DC controller PCB, thereby
turning ON the secondary side of the main
transformer (T4) and applying the developing bias
DC component.
The application voltage is read as the BIAS
signal (analog signal) from the developing DC bias
voltage detection circuit while the developing bias
DC component is being applied and is used to
control the output voltage to a constant level.
The machine exerts control so that the voltage
of the developing bias DC component varies
between -80 and -560 V as a result of varying the
output of the BPWM signal.
To meet the increases in the light area potential
(VL)causedbythedeteriorationofthephotosensitive
drum, the machine is equipped with a copy density
correctionvolume.Youmayturnthevolume(VR851/
860)toadjusttheDCbiaspotentialforeachincrease
in VL, thereby ensuring fogging-free images.
3. TurningON/OFFtheDevelopingBias
The microprocessor on the composite power
supply PCB generates the ACBIAS signal (pulse
signal) under the control of the microprocessor
master (Q301) on the DC controller PCB. The
signal causes the developing bias AC component
generation transformer (T3) to turn ON, and the
sum of the AC component of the developing bias
and the DC component is applied:
➀
➁
(to light)
(to dark)
VR850
Developing bias
DC component
Lighter
• Application frequency:
• Application voltage:
about 2400 Hz
about 1300 Vp-p
Medium
Darker
-500
-400
4. Controlling the Voltage Level of the
Developing Bias DC Component
The machine changes the voltage level of the
DC component of the developing bias to suit the
following:
-100
F1 (dark)
5
8
(light)
Copy density
Figure 3-309
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The DC controller in turn computes the optimum
value for the developing bias to be used during
copying based on the input it has received, and it
sendstheresultofthecomputationtothecomposite
powersupplyPCB.Figure3-310showsthechanges
in the DC component of the developing bias in
relation to different original densities.
The graph uses the degree of exposure that
provides optimum densities when a newspaper or
the Test Sheet is copied to ensure fogging-free
copies.
H. Copy Density Automatic
Control
1. Outline
The machine is equipped with an automatic
density correction (AE) function that controls the
DC component of the developing bias to suit the
density of the original used. As long as the original
has an even density, the machine will adjust the DC
component of the developing bias to generate
fogging-free copies.
The DC component that has been adjusted in
AE mode may be checked on the copy density
indicator on the control panel.
Developing DC bias
Copy density 9
equivalent
2. Control Operations
Copy density 7.5
equivalent
The scanning lamp (FL1) is turned on at a
specific intensity during initial rotation (INTR), and
the scanner is moved forward for about 65 mm to
expose the original.
In this condition, the reflected light within the
area shown in Figure 3-311 is checked by the AE
sensor (photodiode), and the result is sent to the
DC controller PCB.
Copy density 5
equivalent
Original density
Test Sheet
Newspaper
Figure 3-310
27 mm
(approx.)
Center reference
50 mm (approx.)
A
14 mm
27 mm
(approx.) (approx.)
Note: A represents the sensor position.
Figure 3-311 AE Sensor Reading Area
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
• automatic adjustment of the lamp intensity during
AE scanning (No. 301)
• reference point adjustment for the copy density
(developing bias) for AE mode (No. 302)
• slopeadjustmentforthecopydensity(developing
bias) for AE mode (No. 303)
3. AE Adjustment
Themachine’sAEadjustmentmaybeperformed
in service mode, and it consists of the following
three:
Item
Function
Adjustments
Remarks
No. 301 Automatic
adjustment of
Automatically adjusted so
that copy density 5 is
attained when the Test
Chart is copied.
9
Light
lamp intensity
during AE
Copy
density 5
scanning
Dark
Original
density
Test Chart
No. 302 Reference point
adjustment for the
copy density
qIf the setting is decreased
in service mode, the AE
copy will be darker.
➁
➀
9
Light
(developing bias)
for AE mode
wIf the setting is increased
in service mode, the AE
copy will be lighter.
Copy
density 5
Default: 0
Settings:-26 to +26
Dark
Original
density
Test Chart
No. 303 Slope adjustment
for the copy
qIf the setting is increased
in service mode, the
copies of a newspaper
will be light.
wIf the setting is decreased
in service mode, the
copies of a newspaper
will be darker.
➀
➁
9
Light
density
(developing bias)
for AE mode
Copy
density 5
Dark
Newspaper Original
density
Test Chart
Default: 0
Settings:-26 to +26
Note:
After AE adjustment with Test Chart NA3, using AE mode, density adjustment should show “5”. In non-
AE mode, using NA3, density “5” must be appropriate (adjusted with VR850).
Table 3-302
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The No. 1 stirring rod is used to supply toner to
the developing cylinder and stir the layer of toner
inside the developing chamber.
I. Developing/Cleaning As-
sembly
The No. 2 stirring blade is used to stir the toner
inside the toner container and to supply toner to the
developing chamber.
The waste toner collected by the cleaning blade
is moved by the waste toner feeding blade for
collection in the waste toner container.
1. Outline
Themachine’sphotosensitivedrum,developing
cylinder, No. 1 stirring rod, and No. 2 stirring blade
are rotated by the drive of the main motor (M1).
Theleveloftonerinsidethedevelopingassembly
is checked by the toner sensor; if the toner level
drops below a specific level, the ADD TONER
message is indicated on the control panel.
Drum cartridge
Toner container
Primary charging
roller
Cleaning blade
Photosensitive
drum
Toner sensor
Waste toner
feeding blade
Waste toner
assembly
Developing
cylinder
No. 1
stirring rod
No. 2 stirring blade
Toner level
detection PCB
Torque limiter
Main motor/
Main motor
driver PCB
M1
Motor drive signal
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-312
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
identified by the toner level sensor and communi-
cated to the antenna sensor circuit.
2. Toner Level Detection Control
Theleveloftonerinsidethecartridgeismonitored
by the antenna sensor circuit.
Insidethecartridgeisthetonerlevelsensor, and
an AC bias is applied to the developing cylinder.
The developing cylinder and the toner level
sensor are bonded statistically, and the amount of
static charge between the two varies according to
the level of toner inside the cartridge. For this
reason, an AC bias which suits the level of toner is
The antenna sensor circuit is directly supplied
withaspecific,attenuatedACbiasbythecomposite
power supply for use as a reference signal.
Theantennasensorcircuitcomparesthesignal
from the toner level sensor against the reference
signal to find out the level of toner.
Toner level
sensor
Blade mount
Developing assembly
frame
Toner
Blade
DC controller
Antenna sensor circuit
Comparator circuit
PCB
Developing cylinder
TEP*
Figure 3-313
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
q If the toner is more than a specific level,
Sincetonerexistsaroundthetonerlevelsensor,
the AC bias generated by the sensor is greater
than the reference signal.
absent signal (TEP*) to go ‘1’.
Themicroprocessor(Q301)ontheDCcontroller
circuit checks the level of toner only during
copyingoperation(ACbiasON);ifitcontinuously
detects the toner empty signal 0 for 3 min or
more, it flashes the REPLACE CARTRIDGE
message on the control panel after finishing the
ongoing copying run.
In this condition, the output of the comparator
circuit goes ‘1’ and the toner absent signal
(TEP*) goes ‘0’.
w If toner is less than a specific level,
Since toner around the toner level sensor
decreases,theACbiasgeneratedbythesensor
decreases.
e Torque Limiter
If an excess load is imposed on the
photosensitive drum as when the waste toner
becomes full while the photosensitive drum is
rotating, the torque limiter turns on to stop the
rotation of the photosensitive drum by cutting
the drive from the main motor.
On the other and, the output voltage remains
high since the reference signal remains
unchanged.
The difference in potential causes the output of
the comparator circuit to go ‘0’ and the toner
Power switch Copy Start key
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
message flashed
ON
ON
STBY
Copy
STBY
Copy
STBY
Copy
Main motor (M1)
Toner level detection
Toner absent signal (TEP*)
AC bias
1st (3 sec)
3rd (0.5 sec)
2nd (1 sec)
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
message (flashed)
A43, AE, 3 copies, continuous.
Figure 3-314
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Themachine’sblankexposureareaiscontrolled
by two slide shutters and one open/close shutter.
J. Blank Exposure Control
1. Outline
The machine directs light from the pre-exposure
lamptothephotosensitivedrumbywayofareflecting
plate for blank exposure, thereby blanking out gaps
between sheets of paper and non-image areas.
Change solenoid (SL1)
M3
Lens motor
Gear A
Slide shutter (rear)
Gear B
Size blanking
reflecting plate
Full blanking
reflecting plate
Blanking
shutter
solenoid
(SL3)
Slide shutter
(front)
Pre-exposure lamp
Open/close shutter
Blanking shutter
home position sensor
(PS3)
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-315
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Blanking the Non-Image Area (re-
duction)
3. Blanking the Leading/Trailing Edge
Margin and Sheet Gap
In reduction mode, the change solenoid (SL1)
turns ON, and the lens is moved to suit the selected
reduction ratio. At this time, turning the change
solenoid (SL1) OFF allows the drive of the lens
motortobetransmittedtogearA/B;theslideshutter
(rear/front)movesforthedistancecorrespondingto
the selected reduction ratio. In this condition, the
exposure window opens, and the light from the pre-
exposure lamp is directed to the photosensitive
drum through the size blanking reflecting plate.
Themicroprocessor(Q301)ontheDCcontroller
turns ON/OFF the blanking shutter solenoid drive
signal(BSSLD*),therebyopening/closingtheopen/
close shutter to blank out the leading/trailing edge
margin or the gap between sheets of paper.
Size blanking optical path
Size blanking
reflecting plate
Full blanking
Full blanking reflecting plate
optical path
Open/close
shutter
Slide shutter
Pre-exposure optical path
Image exposure
optical path
Drum cleaning
assembly
Drum
cartridge
Pre-exposure
reflecting plate
Photosensitive
drum
Figure 3-317
A
B
Figure 3-316
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Primary Charging Roller Cleaning
Operations
K. Primary Charging Roller
Cleaning Control
Themicroprocessor(Q301)ontheDCcontroller
PCB generates the primary charging roller cleaning
solenoid(SL4)ONsignal(PCLSLD),therebyforcing
the cleaning pad against the roller for 2 sec. (During
this period, the cleaning roller rotates about four
times.)
1. Outline
The machine’s primary charging roller is
equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism.
The automatic cleaning mechanism cleans the
primary charging roller under the following
conditions:
• During initial rotation (INTR) after making 250
or more copies (accumulative; i.e., after
executing transfer roller locking/releasing
control five times).
Primary charging roller
Primary charging roller
cleaning solenoid
Fulcrum
Fulcrum
Cleaning pad
Drum unit
Drum
Figure 3-318
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
L. Transfer Roller Locking/
Releasing Control
1. Outline
The machine’s transfer roller is equipped with a
locking/releasing mechanism.
The locking/releasing mechanism operates to
lockorreleasethetransferroller,therebypreventing
adhesion of toner to the roller under the following
condition:
• Duringlastrotation(LSTR)aftermaking50copies
or more.
Photosensitive drum
Transfer roller
Transfer roller locking
releasing solenoid
Locking
Fulcrum
Releasing
Figure 3-319
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
(M1).
IV. PICK-UP/FEEDING
SYSTEM
When two-sided or overlay copying is selected,
the paper first moves through the fixing assembly
andthenthroughtheduplexingunitbeforeitreaches
the registration roller once again. The paper path is
provided with the following photointerrupters, and
the machine identifies a jam if copy paper fails to
reach or move past specific sensors within specific
periods of time:
• Registration roller paper sensor
• Separation paper sensor
• Delivery paper sensor
• Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor
• Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor
• Duplexing unit outlet paper sensor
• Duplexing unit inlet paper sensor
• Duplexing unit pre-registration paper sensor
In addition, the cassette is provided with
photointerrupters (PS4, PS13) and the multifeeder
isequippedwithyetanotherphotointerrupter(PS5).
A. Pick-Up from the Machine
1. Outline
When the pick-up clutch (CL2, CL3, or CL5)
turns ON while the main motor is rotating, the
appropriate pick-up roller rotates to pick up paper.
Thepaperisthenforwardedtotheregistrationroller
by way of the vertical path roller if it is from the
cassette or directly if it is from the manual feeding
tray.
Copy paper is controlled by the registration
roller so that its leading edge matches the image on
the photosensitive drum, and it is moved through
the transfer, separation, feeding, fixing, and deliv-
ery assembly to reach the copy tray.
The delivery roller is driven by the special deliv-
ery motor (M6). The set-back roller in the duplexing
unit is also driven by the special duplexing motor
(M7). Other motors are driven by the main motor
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
CL3
CL1
SL8
SL2
CL4
CL6
CL2
M5
CL5
M1
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-401
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
PS7
PS8
PS6
PS3
PS17
PS15
PS14
PS16
PS4
PS12
PS13
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-402
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding system; A4, 2 copies, cassette 1)
Copy Start
key ON
INTER SRFW SCRV SRFW SCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch
(CL2)
Registration clutch (CL1)
Vertical path roller
1 paper sensor (PS11)
Registration sensor (PS6)
Separation sensor (PS7)
Delivery sensor (PS8)
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Figure 3-403
3. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding system; A4, 2 copies, cassette 2)
Copy Start
key ON
INTR
SRFW SCRV SRFW SCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch
(CL5)
Registration clutch (CL1)
Vertical path roller
2 paper sensor (PS12)
Vertical path roller
1 paper sensor (PS11)
Registration sensor (PS6)
Separation sensor (PS7)
Delivery sensor (PS8)
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Figure 3-404
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
then sent to the duplexing unit. The paper stops
several millimeters in front of the duplexing unit
outletpapersensor(PS14)andwaitsforcopyingon
the second side.
Theduplexingunitiscapableofaccommodating
10 sheets of A4, A4R (2 sheets of A3).
B. Making Two-Sided Copies
(1 copy)
1. Outline
The copy paper takes the following path.
Whencopyingonthefirstside, thedeliveryroller
reverses after the paper from the fixing assembly
has moved past the delivery sensor; the paper is
Copying on the 1st Side
Registration
roller
Registration
paper sensor
Separation
sensor
Fixing film
Copy exit sensor
Outlet solenoid
Outlet motor
(forward)
Figure 3-405
Set-back rollers
Outlet
roller
(reverse)
Duplex exit detect
sensor
Duplex inlet
sensor
Figure 3-406
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Copying on the 2nd Side
(forward)
Figure 3-407
2. Sequence of Operations (two-sided; 1 copy, A4)
Copy Start
key ON
Copy Start key
ON (2nd side)
SCFW
SCRV LSTR
STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
Registration paper sensor (PS6)
Registration roller clutch (CL1)
Delivery sensor (PS8)
Duplexing unit inlet paper sensor
(PS15)
Duplexing unit motor (M5)
Duplexing unit outlet clutch (CL4)
Duplexing unit outlet sensor (PS14)
CW rotation
CCW rotation
Figure 3-408
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The set-back mechanism is used under the
following conditions:
C. Duplexing Unit
1. Outline
1. Copy Paper Size
The machine uses a set-back method and a
separation flapper during continuous two-sided
copying. The term set-back method refers to a
method of preventing double feeding by stacking
(tiling) sheets of paper in the limited space of the
duplexing unit. The presence of the separation
flapper at the outlet of the duplexing unit serves to
improve separation of sheets.
A3, A4, A4R and A5
2. Copy Count
Up to 10 (A4, A4R) or 2 (A3)
Set-back
roller 1
Copy paper
Duplexing unit
lower plate
Figure 3-409
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Set-Back Operations
The lower feeding inlet roller and the lower feeding outlet roller are driven by the main motor, and the set-
back roller is driven by a special stepping motor.
Duplex outlet roller
Set-back rollers
Duplex inlet detect
Duplex exit detect
sensor (PS14)
sensor (PS15)
Duplex
assembly
Figure 3-410
1st copy enters
duplexing unit
2nd copy enters
duplexing unit
Copy Start key ON
COPY
COPY
Duplexing outlet sensor (PS14)
Duplexing inlet paper sensor (PS15)
Duplexing unit motor (M5)
CW rotation
CCW rotation
Figure 3-411
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
a. Set-Back Operations
1. The first copy moves from the delivery assembly to the duplexing unit.
Lower feeder
assembly outlet
Duplex
iniet detect roller
Duplex exit
detect sensor (PS14)
Set-back roller 1
roller
Figure 3-412
2. The leading edge of the copy paper butts against the set-back roller 1 and forms an arch.
Set-back roller 1
Figure 3-413
Set-back rollers
Figure 3-414
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. The set-back rollers 1 rotate counterclockwise, and the leading edge of the copy paper stops at a point
about 12 mm past the set-back roller 1.
12mm
Figure 3-415
4. The second copy paper is moved to the duplexing unit.
Figure 3-416
5. The leading edge of the second copy paper butts against the set-back roller 1 and forms an arch.
Set-back roller 1
Figure 3-417
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
6. The set-back rollers 1 rotate clockwise, thereby pulling the trailing edge of the second copy paper out the
duplexing unit inlet.
Set-back rollers
12mm
Figure 3-418
7. Theset-backrollers1and2rotatecounterclockwise, andtheleadingedgeofthesecondcopypaperstops
at a point about 12 mm past the set-back roller 1.
12mm 12mm
Figure 3-419
8. Operations 4 through 7 are repeated for as many times as there are copies to make, and the copies are
stacked in the duplexing unit.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
9. The set-back rollers 1 rotates counterclockwise, thereby stopping the trailing edge of the first copy paper
6 mm before the set-back rollers 1.
Duplex exit
detect sensor (PS14)
Set-back roller
6mm
Figure 3-420
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The machine’s duplexing unit outlet is equipped
with a flapper to improve separation of stacked
paper, and the operation is as described below.
3. Re-Pick Up Operation
After copying on the first side, the copy paper
stacked in the duplexing unit is picked up once
again for copying on the second side.
Sequence of Operations (re-pick up; A4, 2 copies)
Copy Start key ON
(2nd side)
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
Duplexing unit motor (M5)
Duplexing unit outlet clutch (CL4)
Registration sensor (PS6)
Registration clutch (CL1)
CW rotation
CCW rotation
Figure 3-421
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
1. After the Copy Start key is pressed for the second side, the set-back roller and the duplexing unit outlet
roller rotate clockwise.
Set-back rollers
Outlet roller duplex (CL4)
Figure 3-422
2. When the first copy paper reaches the duplexing unit outlet sensor, the set-back roller and the duplexing
unit outlet roller stop; the outlet roller duplex rotates.
Duplex exit detect sensor (PS14)
Figure 3-423
3. When the trailing edge of the first copy paper leaves the set-back roller, the set-back roller rotates
counterclockwise, thereby returning the second copy paper.
Photosensitive
drum
Slip roller
Set-back roller
Figure 3-424
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
4. When the registration sensor turns ON, the set-back roller and the duplexing unit outlet roller rotate
clockwise to pick up the second copy paper.
Separation
sensor
Photosensitive
drum
Registration sensor(PS6)
Slip roller
Figure 3-425
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
the same path as it would if picked up from the
machine’s cassette.)
The cassette unit is equipped with a pick-up
sensor (PS1cu, PS3cu) to detect the arrival of copy
paper and determine when to turn off the pick-up
roller to suit the size of the paper.
D. Pick-Up from the Cassette
Feeding Module-A2
1. Pick-Up Operation
When the pick-up clutch (CL1cu, CL2cu) turns
ON while the cassette unit motor (M1cu) is rotating,
the pick-up roller rotates to start pick-up operation;
the copy paper is sent as far as the vertical path
rollerafterthepick-up. (Thepaper, thereafter, takes
To Copier
Pick-up roller
PS1cu
PS2cu
Vertical path roller
Pick-up clutch
Casette 3 size detection
CL1cu
Pick-up roller
Cassette 3
PS4cu
Pick-up clutch
Casette 4 size detection
PS3cu
CL2cu
Cassette 4
Cassette
unit motor
M1cu
Cassette drive PCB
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-426
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Sequence of Operations (cassette 3; A4, 2 copies)
Copy Start key
ON
INTR
SRFW
SCRV
SRFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch
(CL1cu)
Cassette 3 vertical path sensor
(PS1cu)
Cassette unit motor (M1cu)
Registration clutch (CL1)
Registration sensor (PS6)
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-427
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The drive of the cassette unit motor 2 (M2cu) is
used by the pick-up operation of cassette 5.
Whenthepick-upclutch(CL1cu,CL2cu,CL3cu)
turns ON, the appropriate pick-up roller rotates, and
the vertical path roller moves the copy paper to the
copier’s vertical path roller. (The copy paper then
takes the same path as it would if picked up from the
machine’s cassette.)
E. Pick-Up from the Cassette
Feeding Unit-K1
1. Pick-Up Operation
Thecassetteunitmotor1(M1cu)isusedtodrive
the vertical path roller, and its drive is also used by
the pick-up operation for cassettes 3 and 4.
Thecassetteunithasthreeverticalpathsensors
used to check the pick-up operation for each
cassette.
To copier
PS1cu
PS2cu
CL1cu
PS3cu
PS4cu
PS6cu
CL2cu
PS5cu
CL3cu
M2cu
M1cu
Cassette driver PCB
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-428
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding system; A4, 2 copies, cassette 3)
Copy Start key
ON
INTR
SRFW
SCRV
SRFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Pick-up motor 1 (M1cu)
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch
(CL1cu)
Cassette
feeding
module
Cassette 3 vertical
path sensor (PS1cu)
Registration clutch (CL1)
Registration sensor (PS6)
Copier
Scanner home position sensor
(PS1)
Figure 3-429
3. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding system; A4, 2 copies, cassette 5)
Copy Start key
ON
INTR
SRFW
SCRV SRFW
SCRV LSTR
STBY
Pick-up motor 1 (M1cu)
Pick-up motor 2 (M2cu)
Cassette
feeding
module
Cassette 5 pick-up clutch
(CL3u)
Cassette 5 vertical path
sensor (PS5cu)
Registration clutch (CL1)
Registration sensor (PS6)
Copier
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Figure 3-430
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
F. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1
1. Basic Construction
The paper deck unit controls the operation of
eachloadaccordingtothesignalsfromthepedestal
controller PCB to send paper to the copier.
Each of the loads used to pick-up and feed paper or
raise the lifter is driven by the pedestal motor.
If you operated the deck size switch, the size of
the inside of the deck is communicated to the copier
through the pedestal controller PCB.
J112-2 Deck vertical path roll paper sensor signal (DVRPD)
J113-7 Deck vertical path roller drive signal (CL2D)*
J202-2 Pedestal motor drive signal (PEDMD)
Deck vertical
path roller
J202-3 Pedestal motor speed error signal (LOCK)*
M1
CL2
Pedestal
J113-5 Deck pick-up drive signal (CL1D)
controller
PCB
J112-5 Deck paper sensor (DPD)
J114-5 Deck lifter drive signal (CL4D)*
CL4
CL1
PS2
J114-7 Deck pick-up roller release signal (DEPRL)*
SL1
J112-8 Deck lifter posision sensor signal (DLD)
J113-2 Deck lifter limit sensor signal (DEL)
J113-9 Deck open sensor signal (DEOP)*
PS1
Feeding
roller
PS6 PS4 PS3
Pick-up
roller
Separation roller
Copy paper
Lifter
M1: Pedestal motor
CL1: Deck pick-up clutch
PS2: Deck vertical path roller paper sensor
PS1: Deck paper sensor
CL2: Deck vertical path roller drive clutch
CL4: Deck lifter drive clutch
SL1: Deck pick-up roller release solenoid
PS3: Deck lifter position sensor
PS4: Deck lifter upper limit sensor
PS6: Deck open sensor
Figure 3-431
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
2. Pick-Up/Feeding Operation
a. Mechanism
Whenthecopier’sCOPYSTARTkeyispressed,
the deck pick-up clutch (CL1) turns on to rotate the
deck pick-up roller. The deck pick-up roller leaves
the paper when the deck pick-up roller release
solenoid (SL1) turns on after feeding the paper.
The feeding roller and the separation roller
serve to make sure that no more than one sheet of
paper is fed to the feeding path; after leaving both
rollers, thepaperismovedtotheinsideofthecopier
by the vertical path roller.
J202-2 PEDMD
M1
Deck vertical path roller
CL2
J113-7
CL2D*
J112-2 DVRPD
Pedestal
controller
PCB
PS2
CL1
SL1
J113-5 CL1D*
J114-7 DEPRL
Feeding
roller
Pick-up roller
Separation roller
Copy paper
Lifter
M1: Pedestal motor
CL1: Deck pick-up clutch
SL1: Deck pick-up roller release solenoid
PS2: Deck vertical path roller paper sensor
CL2: Deck vertical path roller drive clutch
Figure 3-432
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
b. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations (A4, 2 copies)
Copy Start key
ON
SCRV
SCRV
INTR
SCFW
SCFW
LSTR
Pick-up request signal
(from copier)
Copier
Deck pick-up clutch
(CL1)
Deck pick-up roller
release solenoid (SL1)
Deck vertical path roller
paper sensor (PS2)
Deck vertical path roller
drive clutch (CL2)
Vertical path roller 3
drive clutch (CL3)
Figure 3-433
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Lifter Operation
a. Operation
When the deck is slid inside the pedestal, the
pick-up roller lowers and the light-blocking plate
leaves the deck lifter position sensor (PS3). The
condition causes the lifter drive clutch (CL4) to turn
on, and the drive of the pedestal motor (M1) is
transmitted to the cable take-up shaft, thereby
raising the lifter.
Thelifterkeepsrisinguntilthedecklifterposition
sensor (PS3) detects the top sheet of the paper
stack placed on the lifter.
The deck lifter upper limit sensor (PS4) serves to
stopthelifterintheeventthatthesensorarmshould
block the deck lifter position sensor (PS3) for some
reason.
When the lifter has reached its upper limit, it is
maintained in position by the work of one-way gear.
When the deck is removed from the pedestal, the
take-up gear disengages itself from the one-way
gear, thereby allowing the lifter to lower in its own
weight.
Feeding roller
Deck lifter position sensor Lifter detecting
Paper detecting
spacer
(PS3)
lever
Pick-up roller shaft
Pick-up
roller arm
Copy paper
Separation roller
Lifter
Deck
:
:
Pick-up roller up, i.e., the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever
lowers to block the deck lifter position sensor (PS3)
Pick-up roller down, i.e., the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever
rises to leave the deck lifter position sensor (PS3)
Figure 3-434
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
b. Lifter Operation
Deck motor
M
Feeding roller
Pick-up roller
Separation roller
Lifter position
sensor (PS3)
Paper sensor
Paper deteciting spacer
Paper detecting
lever
Pick-up roller
Lifter limit detecting lever
Lifter upper limit
sensor (PS4)
Copy paper
Oil damper
Figure 3-435
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
4. Detecting Paper in the Deck
a. Identifying the Size of Paper
You must set the switch (SW1) on the deck size
switch PCB to suit the size of paper set inside the
paper deck.
b. Identifying the Presence/Absence of Paper
Thepresenceandabsenceofcopypaperinside
the paper deck is identified by the deck paper
sensor (PS1).
When the paper deck runs out of paper, the
paper detecting spacer attached to the pick-up
roller shaft drops.
When you set the switch, the paper size signal
(SIZE1 and SIZE2) sent to the pedestal controller
PCB changes to ‘1’ or ‘0’.
As a result, the paper detecting lever leaves the
deck paper sensor (PS1), causing the pedestal
controller PCB to identify the absence of paper.
Based on the combination of these paper size
signals, the pedestal controller PCB identifies the
size of the paper inside the paper deck as follows:
Paper detecting lever
Paper detecting spacer
Paper size*
SIZE 1
SIZE 2
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
B5
1
0
1
2
1
0
A4
LTR
*The configuration of SW 1 represents when the
switch is viewed from the front.
Paper sensor (PS1)
Table 2-401
Lifter
Figure 3-436
Paper detecting lever
Paper detecting spacer
Paper sensor (PS1)
Lifter
Figure 3-437
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The copy paper on the tray is forced against the
pick-up roller by the paper guide plate; the pick-up
roller starts to rotate when it receives drive from the
main motor (M1) through a clutch.
The pick-up roller and the separation pad serve
to make sure that no more than a single sheet of
copy paper is sent to the registration roller.
The above series of operations is executed for
each pick-up.
G. Multifeeder
1. Outline
The multifeeder is a mechanism which picks up
paperfromitstrayandwhichiscapableofcontinuous
pick-up operation.
The copy paper on the tray is detected by the
multifeeder paper sensor (PS5).
Main motor
M1
Multifeeder pick-up
clutch
CL3
Multifeeder paper sensor
Paper sensor lever
Paper guide plate
PS5
Multifeeder tray
Photosensitive
drum
PS6
Separation pad
Registration roller
Registration
roller
paper sensor
Multifeeder pick-up
solenoid
Paper guide plate cam
SL2
Spring
clutch
Figure 3-438
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
All this is used to control how long blank expo-
sure should take, how long the registration roller
should remain ON, and how long high voltage
should remain ON.
2. Identifying the Size of Paper on the
Multifeeder Tray
The size of paper on the tray is identified by the
variable resistor (VR1) that operates in association
with the slide guide moving in relation to the slide
guide moved by the user to suit the width of the
paper.
The identified width of the copy paper is used to
control the lens and blank exposure.
The length of paper placed on the multifeeder
trayisidentifiedinrelationtohowlongtheregistration
sensor (PS6) remains ON.
Reference:
The maximum length of paper is Ledger (432
mm). Pages longer than this will be likely to jam.
DC controller PCB
Slide guide (rear)
Variable resistor (VR1)
Slide guide (Front)
Multifeeder tray
Figure 3-439
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Sequence of Operations (multifeeder; A4, 2 copies)
Copy Start key
ON
INTR
SRFW
SCRV
SRFW
SCRV
LSTR
Multifeeder pick-up solenoid
(SL2)
Multifeeder pick-up clutch
(CL3)
Pre-registration sensor (PS6)
Registration clutch (CL2)
Scanner motor (M2)
Figure 3-440
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Specific combinations of the states (ON/OFF) of
thephotointerruptersareusedbythemicroprocessor
on the DC controller PCB to identify the presence/
absence of a cassette and the size of the cassette
(if any) and to control scanner reversal and blank
exposure. (See Table 3-402.)
H. Identifying the Size of the
Cassette
Specific photointerrupters (Q651, Q652, Q653,
Q654) turn OFF or ON when a cassette is slid into
a cassette holder.
Configuration
Q652
Q653
Q651
Q654
Cassette size
(left)
(right)
0
No cassette
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
B5R
A4
(182 × 257)
(297 × 220)
(297 × 420)
1
0
1
0
A3
Mini (STMTR) 5.5" × 8.5"
(148 × 216)
Legal 8.5" × 14"
(356 × 216)
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
Letter 11" × 8.5"
(279 × 216)
A4R
(210 × 297)
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
Letter R 8.5" × 11"
(216 × 279)
A5R
A5
(149 × 218)
(218 × 149)
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
Mini-R (STMT) 8.5" × 5.5"
(216 × 148)
B5
B4
(257 × 182)
(364 × 257)
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Ledger 11" × 17"
(182 × 257)
*U
1
1
1
1
(182 ~ 283 × 198 ~ 354)
(unit: mm)
Table 3-402
1: Photointerrupter blocking the light.
0: Photointerrupter not blocking the light.
* Sizes may be stored in memory within dimensions given (in mm; see the Service Handbook for details).
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
To change the size of a cassette, move the
guideplates(horizontal,vertical)insidethecassette
andalsomovethepapersizeleverfoundatthefront
of the cassette to the left or right so that the arrow
points to the appropriate paper size as indicated in
Figure 3-441.
Reference:
The size of copy paper which is in wide use in
a specific area may not be common in another
area. Setting paper of a size different from the
pre-setsizewillnotturnonthesizeindicationon
the display. This however, will not prevent the
correct copying control sequence for the paper.
For instance, if you set LTR copy paper in an
AB-configured machine (also setting the paper
size lever to LTR size), the machine will control
copying operations based on LTR size paper.
Caution:
A discrepancy between the size of the copy
paper being used and the size selected by the
paper size lever will trigger an incorrect copying
sequence, leading to jamming and soiling.
Advise the user so that both sizes match.
Guide plate (horizontal)
Guide plates (vertical)
Paper size lever
Figure 3-441
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
I. Fixing/Delivery Assembly
1. Controlling the Fixing Roller Tem-
perature
Theupperandlowerrollersofthefixingassembly
and the delivery roller of the delivery unit are driven
by the main motor (M1).
Theupperrollerisheatedbyaheater(H1:900W)
built in it.
The DC controller monitors the surface
temperature of the upper roller by means of two
thermistor (TH1, TH2) so as to control the
temperature to a specific value.
The temperature of the upper fixing roller is
controlled as follows (paper area):
160°C (at standby, during copy operation)
175°C (during copy operation)
Topreventdropsinthetemperatureoftheupper
roller during continuous copy operation, the control
temperature is as follow, measured with main ther-
mistor (TH1) Located out of paper area.
Aux themistor (TH2) is at same position of main
thermistor and is checking correct function of TH1.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Target temperatures for the following size paper:
A3 – A4
B4 – B5
A4R – A5 – Folio
B5R – B6
A5R – A6
Argentine letter
Oficio Equador
Australian Foolscap
Ledger – Letter
Argentine Legal
Government Letter R – Government Legal Mini (STM) R
Government letter – Executive
Government Korea
Argentine Letter R
Officio – Oficio Bolivia
Foolscap – Legal – Letter R – Mini
Government Korea R
Executive R
B6R
A6R
Postcard
Peak
Target
Peak
Target
Peak
Target
Peak
Target
number temperature
number temperature
number temperature
number temperature
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
> 21
135
142
146
149
153
155
157
159
160
161
162
163
163
164
164
165
165
166
166
166
167
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
134
145
149
154
160
164
168
171
173
175
176
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
184
185
186
187
188
188
189
189
190
190
191
191
192
192
193
194
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
126
140
148
153
158
162
165
167
170
171
173
175
176
178
179
180
180
181
181
182
182
183
183
184
185
185
185
186
186
187
187
187
188
188
188
188
189
189
189
189
189
189
189
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
190
191
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
124
138
147
154
160
165
169
171
173
175
177
179
181
182
183
184
185
187
188
189
189
190
190
191
191
192
193
194
194
194
195
195
196
196
197
197
197
198
198
199
199
199
199
200
200
201
201
202
202
202
202
202
203
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
> 34
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
> 57
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
> 53
Table 3-403
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The copier is equipped with three protection
mechanisms to prevent the fixing heater from going
ON at wrong timing.
2. Oil Application Roller
The upper fixing roller is provided with an oil
application roller for cleaning and application of oil.
Normally, the oil application roller remains away
from the fixing roller, and it comes into contact with
the upper fixing roller only when copy paper passes
through.
The mechanism is driven by the oil application
solenoid (SL6); SL6 goes ON 1 sec after the
registration roller goes ON; it then goes OFF as
soon as the main motor (M1) goes OFF thereby
bringing the oil application roller into contact with
the upper fixing roller.
• The microprocessor monitors the voltage of
TH1 and indicates ‘E000’ or ‘E001’ or ‘E002’
or ‘H003’ in response to an error.
• If the voltage of TH1 and TH2 falls below
about 0.9 V (equivalent of 215°C), the error
detection circuit cuts off the supply power to
the fixing heater regardless of the output of
the microprocessor.
If the inside temperature of the thermal switch
rises above 220°C, the power to the fixing heater
will be off.
Note:
Once the contact of the thermoswitch (TS1)
opens,thethermoswitchcannotbeusedunless
cooledto0°Corless;thecontactwillnotrecover
at ambient temperature.
DC controller PCB
Oil application solenoid
J324A-4 SL6D
SL6
Microprocessor
(slave)
Oil application roller
Main motor
M1
J324A- 1 TH1
Thermistor(TH1);Main
-2
-3
Fixing heater
(H1)
Thermistor(TH2);Auxiliary
Microprocessor
(master)
-4
Thermoswitch
(220˚C)
Delivery roller
Upper fixing roller
TS1
J319- 1 HTON
- 3 HTRD
SSR ON
detection
Lower fixing roller
Cleaning roller
SSR
Power supply
24V
J307-2 ACOFF
Relay(K1)
Error detection
circuit
Table 3-442
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Operation of Fixing Assembly Tem-
perature Control System
COPY START key
ON
155˚C) (TH2;175˚C)
Power switch
ON
115˚C
(50˚C)(TH1
;
WMUP WMUPR
STBY
SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR
STBY
Main motor(M1);
Scanner cooling fan(FM2)
Slow
Exhaust fan(FM1)
Fixing roller heater(H1)
Oil application solenoid(SL6)
WAIT indicator
(COPY START key indicator)
Glows green
Glows orange
190˚C
180˚C
170˚C
155˚C
115˚C
90˚C
50˚C
; Actual temperature(Paper area)
; TH1/TH2 control temperature(Control area)
Figure 3-443
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
4. Detecting Overheating of the End of
the Fixing Heater
5. Protection Mechanism
The machine is equipped with the following
protection mechanisms to prevent malfunction of
the fixing heater:
The rear end of the machine’s fixing heater is
equipped with a sub thermistor (TH2) to detect and
prevent overheating of the end of the fixing heater.
This consideration is made to prevent damage to
the fixing roller caused by overheating occurring as
a result of overheating on the area of the fixing not
covered by paper during copying operation, as
when making copies smaller than B5 in continuous
mode.
• If the temperature of TH2 exceeds 245°C during
the first 10 copies in continuous mode, the fixing
control target temperature is lowered by 5°C.
If the temperature still increases despite the
increase in the sheet gap and TH2 exceeds 265°C,
the ongoing copying operation is stopped and the
power will be turned OFF. At this time, ‘E001’ data
will be stored in memory.
a. Thermistor (TH1, TH2)
1. The microprocessor on the DC controller
monitors the voltage of the thermistor, and if it
detects abnormally high or low temperature it
will cut off the power to the heater and will turn
OFF the machine’s power. At this time, ‘E001’
through ‘E003’ data will be stored in memory.
2. If TH1 is 260°C or more and TH2 is 270°C or
more for 0.3 sec or more, the heater error
detection signal (HTNG) of the DC controller
will turn OFF the relay (RK1) on the composite
power supply PCB to cut off the power to the
fixing heater and will turn OFF the power.
Caution:
Toresetthemachine, disconnecttheconnector
(J4) from the heater, and turn ON the power
while pressing SW850 on the service switch
PCB.
b. Thermal Fuse (FU1)
If the temperature around the thermal fuse
exceeds the fuse rating, the thermal fuse will
blow to cut off the power to the fixing heater.
c. Heater ON Detection
The heater ON detection circuit detects how
long the fixing heater drive signal (HTRD)
remains OFF and if it finds an error, it will turn
OFF the power. At this time, ‘E004’ data will be
stored in memory.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
The machine is equipped with a mechanism to
remember how many copies remain to be made
andthecurrentcopymode,andsuchjaminformation
remains even after you have opened the machine’s
front cover to remove jams.
The microprocessor holds the jam detection
sequences discussed hereafter to check for a jam,
and it identifies a jam also when a sensor detects
paper at power-on.
J. Detecting Jams
As many as ten paper sensors (3 of which are in
the cassette unit) are used to find out whether copy
paper is moving normally.
• Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16)
• Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor (PS12)
• Registration sensor (PS6)
• Separation sensor (PS7)
• Delivery sensor (PS8)
When a jam is identified, the microprocessor
immediately stops the machine operation and cuts
offthepowertothefixingheater(H1);itthenflashes
theJAMmessageonthecontrolpanelwhileflashing
the jam location indicator.
• Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (PS1cu)
• Cassette 4 vertical path sensor (PS3cu)
• Cassette 5 vertical path sensor (PS5cu)
• Vertical path roller paper sensor (PS2; paper
deck pedestal)
The activation of the jam detection mechanism
causes the copy count to remain unchanged.
A jam is identified at such times as instructed by
the program in the microprocessor and in relation to
the presence/absence of paper at specific sensors.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
1. Vertical Path Roller 1 Delay Jam
Copy paper does not reach the vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16) within a specific time after the
cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL2) has turned ON.
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCRV SRFW
STBY
INTR SRFW
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL2)
Jam check
1.2 sec
1.2 sec
Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor
(PS16)
Normal
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-444 Sequence of Operations
2. Vertical Path Roller Timing Jam
Copy paper reaches the vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16) before a specific time after the cassette
1 pick-up clutch (CL2) has turned ON.
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCRV SRFW
STBY
INTR SRFW
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL2)
Jam check
0.8 sec
0.8 sec
Normal
Error
Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor
(PS16)
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-445 Sequence of Operations
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Vertical Path Roller 2 Delay Jam
Paper does not reach the vertical path roller 2 paper sensor within a specific time after the cassette 2 pick-
up clutch (CL5) has turned ON.
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCRV SRFW
STBY
INTR
SRFW
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch (CL5)
Jam check
1.0 sec
Normal
1.0 sec
Error
Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor
(PS12)
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-446 Sequence of Operations
4. Vertical Path Roller 2 Timing Jam
Copy paper reaches the vertical path roller 2 paper sensor before a specific time after the cassette 2 pick-
up clutch (CL5) has turned ON.
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCRV SRFW
STBY
INTR SRFW
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch (CL5)
Jam check
0.8sec
Normal
0.8sec
Vertical path roller 2 paper
sensor (PS12)
Error
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-447 Sequence of Operations
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
5. Pre-Registration Delay Jam (vertical path roller)
Copy paper does not reach the pre-registration sensor (PS6) within a specific time after it has reached the
vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16).
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCRV SRFW
STBY
INTR
SRFW
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch (CL5)
Jam check
1.0 sec
Normal
1.0 sec
Error
Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor
(PS12)
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-448 Sequence of Operations
6. Pre-Registration Timing Jam (vertical path roller)
Copypaperreachesthepre-registrationsensor(PS6)beforeaspecifictimeafterithasreachedthevertical
path roller 1 paper sensor (PS16).
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCRV SRFW
STBY
INTR SRFW
Cassette 2 pick-up clutch (CL5)
Jam check
0.8sec
Normal
0.8sec
Error
Vertical path roller 2 paper
sensor (PS12)
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-449 Sequence of Operations
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
7. Separation Delay Jam
Copy paper does not reach the separation sensor (PS7) within a specific time after the registration clutch
(CL1) has turned ON.
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCRV SRFW
STBY
INTR
SRFW
Registration clutch (CL1)
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
Jam check
Normal
Error
Separation sensor (PS7)
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-450 Sequence of Operations
8. Separation Timing Jam
Copy paper reaches the separation sensor (PS7) before a specific time after the registration clutch (CL1)
has turned ON.
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCRV SRFW
STBY
INTR
SRFW
Registration clutch (CL5)
0.3 sec
0.3 sec
Error
Jam check
Normal
Separation sensor (PS7)
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-451 Sequence of Operations
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
9. Delivery Delay Jam
Copy paper does not reach the delivery sensor (PS8) within a specific time after the separation sensor (PS7)
has turned ON.
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SRFW
INTR
SRFW
SCRV
Separation sensor (PS7)
1 sec
1 sec
Error
Jam check
Normal
Delivery sensor (PS8)
Main motor (M1)
Figure 3-452 Sequence of Operations
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
10. Delivery Stationary Jam
Copy paper does not move past the delivery sensor (PS8) within a specific time after the delivery sensor
has turned ON because of feeding faults.
JAM flashed
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
Normal
Error
Delivery sensor (PS8)
*1
*1
Jam check
Main motor (M1)
1
Varies depending on paper length (paper length + 40 mm).
Figure 3-453 Sequence of Operations
11. Pick-Up Stationary Jam (cassette unit)
Copy paper is over the cassette vertical path sensor (PS1cu, PS3cu, PS5cu) when the cassette pick-up
clutch (CL1cu, CL2cu, CL3cu) turns ON because of feeding faults.
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCFW
STBY
INTR
SCRV
SCFW
Cassette pick-up Clutch (*1)
Jam check
Normal
Error
Cassette vertical path sensor (*2)
Cassette unit motor (M1cu/M2cu)
1
2
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch (CL1cu)
Cassette 4 pick-up clutch (CL2cu)
Cassette 5 pick-up clutch (CL3cu)
Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (PS1cu)
Cassette 4 vertical path sensor (PS3cu)
Cassette 5 vertical path sensor (PS5cu)
Figure 3-454 Sequence of Operations
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
12. Pick-Up Delay Jam (cassette unit)
Copy paper does not reach the cassette vertical path sensor (PS1cu, PS3cu, PS5cu) within a specific time
after the cassette pick-up clutch (CL1cu, CL2cu, CL3cu) has turned ON because of feeding faults.
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
SCFW
STBY
INTR
SCRV
SCFW
Cassette pick-up clutch (*1)
1.3 sec
1.3 sec
Jam check
Normal
Error
Cassette vertical path sensor (*2)
Cassette unit motor (M1cu/M2cu)
1
2
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch (CL1cu)
Cassette 4 pick-up clutch (CL2cu)
Cassette 5 pick-up clutch (CL3cu)
Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (PS1cu)
Cassette 4 vertical path sensor (PS3cu)
Cassette 5 vertical path sensor (PS5cu)
Figure 3-455 Sequence of Operations
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
13. Pick-Up Delay Jam (Paper Deck Pedestal-K1)
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
INTR
Pick-up clutch (CL1)
Jam check
Vertical path roller
paper sensor (PS2)
normal
error
Figure 3-456
14. Pick-Up Timing Jam (Paper Deck Pedestal-K1)
Copy Start key
ON
JAM flashed
Pick-up clutch (CL1)
Jam check
Vertical path roller
paper sensor (PS2)
normal
error
Figure 3-457
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
V. POWER SUPPLY
A. Outline of Power Distribution
Door Power
switch switch
Drum heater
DS1
Cassette heater
Power
plug
Anti-condensation heater
Fixing heater
Charging roller
Developing cylinder
Transfer roller
Static eliminator
Antenna sensor
Intensity sensor
AE sensor
Fixing heater
driver PCB
FU2
High-
T1
voltage
power
supply
unit
+5V
+24
+5V
+24V
+5V
+24V
+5V
DC
Power
supply
+24V
+30V
Sensors
Main
transformer
unit
DC
controller
+24V
Solenoids/Clutches
Fans
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5V
Motors
Relay
RL1
Pre-exposure lamp
BAT
301
Control panel
+5V
CC-IVN
+24V
Counter
+5V
Main motor
M1
+30V
driver PCB
Scanning
lamp
control
circuit
Scanning lamp
Sorter
+24V,5V
+24V,5V
composite power supply circuit
DF/RDF
Deck
+34V,24V,5V
Figure 3-501
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Caution:
B. Power Supply Circuitry
The AC power supply unit remains supplied
with voltage even when the power is OFF.
The machine’s power supply unit uses a single
main transformer (T101) to supply DC power.
AC power is supplied to the DC power supply
when the power switch (SW1) and the door switch
are turned ON.
Reference:
ThetolerancesoftheDCvoltageareasfollows:
• +30 V +10%, -5%
Since DC power to the DC controller circuit will
be cut off in this condition, the machine is equipped
with a lithium battery (BAT301) to back up the RAM
(Q308) in the DC controller circuit.
• +24 V ±5%
• +5V ±5%
However, the above stand when the AC input
inaccuracy is ±10%.
DS1
PWSW
T101
FU1
DC Power
supply
unit
+30V
+24V
+5V
Q308
BAT
301
Power supply unit
DC controller
Figure 3-502
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
•
Detecting Overcurrent in the Low-Voltage
Power Supply
If the composite power supply PCB identifies an
C. Detecting Errors on the
Power Supply PCB
error in any of the DC loads or overcurrent caused
by wire trapping, the LED is on fixed.
The microprocessor (U402) and LED501 on the
composite power supply PCB checks for errors; if
an error is identified, the microprocessor (U402)
communicates with the DC controller to indicate the
results of self diagnosis on the display or to flash
LED501 to alert the user.
•
CommunicationErrorbetweenDCController
PCB and Composite Power Supply PCB
If an error occurs in the communication between
the DC controller PCB and the composite power
supply PCB, ‘E240’ is indicated as soon as the DC
controller PCB identifies an error. In addition, LED
is flashed at intervals of 5 sec when the composite
power supply PCB identifies an error.
•
Data Error in the High-Voltage Output
If the difference between the actual control
value and the setting associated with the high
voltage generated by the microprocessor (U402) is
more than a specific value, the microprocessor
(U402)communicateserrordatatotheDCcontroller
PCB to indicate ‘E064’.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
D. Protection Mechanisms for
the Power Supply Circuit
The composite power supply PCB is
equippedwithanovercurrentdetectioncircuit;
its protection mechanism turns ON to stop the
output if a short circuit occurs because of a
fault in the loads.
When the output is stopped, open the front
door to turn OFF the door switch, correct the
load, and turn ON the door switch and the
power switch to return the output.
Caution:
Be sure to disconnect the connector (J4) before
performing the above work.
Donotrepeat resettingshort-circuits;otherwise,
the built-in fuse (F2) can blow.
Note:
Replace the lithium battery only with the one
listed in the Parts Catalog. Use of different
battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
The battery may present a fire or chemical burn
hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disas-
semble, or dispose of it in fire.
Keep the battery out of reach of children and
discard any used battery promptly.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
VI. SERVICE MODE
A. Outline
B. Using Service Mode
The machine’s service mode is grouped into the
following six:
1. Starting Service Mode
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
actuator.
• If you want to make checks as in “I/O display
mode” while making copies, set the appropri-
ate copying mode.
No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Description
Control display mode
I/O display mode
2) Push the service mode switch (SW850) on the
service mode PCB with a hex key.
• The copy counter display indicates ‘1’.
• While in copy mode, the copy density indica-
tor LED indicates the position of the fixing
belt.
Adjustment mode
Operation/inspection mode
Machine settings mode
Counter mode
• A press on the Reset key ends service mode.
Service mode switch
Table 7-601
Figure 3-601
2. Selecting Service Mode Group
1) While the copy count indicator is indicating ‘1’,
press a key from ‘1’ through ‘6’ on the numeric
keypad to select a service mode.
2) Press the AE key.
• Themachinestartstheselectedservicemode,
and the copy counter indicates ‘301’. ‘301’
means that the mode is the first mode of
service mode 3.
3. Selecting an Item under Each Ser-
vice Mode
1) While the 100’s of the number indicated on the
copy mode counter (‘301’, for example) is flash-
ing, press the numeric keypad to select the
mode you want to execute.
• Thecopycounterindicatorindicatesthenum-
ber, flashing the 100’s.
• A press on the Clear key returns to group
selection (‘3’, for example).
2) Press the Start key.
• Themachinestartstheselectedservicemode.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
4. Using Adjustment Mode (‘3’) and
Machine Settings Mode (‘5’)
1) Press the numeric keypad to change the num-
ber.
7. Recording on the Service Label
Figure 3-601 shows the label attached behind
the front door. Each machine is adjusted and set at
the factory, and the appropriate values are re-
corded on the label.
• The number flashes.
Be sure to record any new settings you entered
inthefieldonthelabel. Further, ifyouhavereplaced
the DC controller, be sure to enter the settings
recorded on the label.
• If the number is negative, ‘%’ turns ON. To
enteranegativenumber, pressthe%keyand
enter the number on the numeric keypad.
2) Press the AE key.
If you have replaced the drum unit or the com-
posite power supply, be sure to enter the settings
recorded on the labels attached to the drum unit or
composite power supply (service parts), and record
these settings on the label.
• The machine stores the value and stops
flashing the value.
• A press on the Start key starts copying opera-
tion.
3) To change the number once again, repeat
steps 1) and 2).
4) Press the Clear key to return to item selection.
Program
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
315
316
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
Meaning
AE curve shift
Value
5. Using Operation/Inspection Mode
(‘4’)
1) Press the Start key to execute the selected
service mode.
2) Press the Stop key to stop and return to item
selection.
AE curve slope
Fixing offset temperature
Register
Leading edge
Register B-side
Leading edge B-side
Trailing edge
• If the mode is designed to stop automatically,
the machine stops and automatically returns
to item selection.
Stack-bypass tail
Blank home
6. Resetting Error Codes (back-up
codes)
If ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, ‘E003’, or ‘E004’ is
indicated, remove the cause of the error and reset
the code that has been backed up.
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
actuator.
2) While holding down the service mode switch
(SW850) on the service PCB with a hex key,
press the power switch.
Blank home reduction
APVC voltage
APVC current
ATVC compensation
Stack-bypass loop
Main register loop
C1_cl_off
C2_cl_off
C3_cl_off
3) Turn OFF/ON the power switch.
Duplex paper stack adj
Duplex inversion roller
Halogen lamp intensity
Duplex input loop
Duplex output loop
Figure 3-602
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
C. Control Display Mode (‘1’)
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.
• To deselect an item, press the Clear key.
• A press on the Start key while a description of the selected service mode is indicated will execute
appropriate copying operations.
No.
Service mode
Description
101 Jam location
Indicates the jam location on the copy counter
indicator. (See the next page.)
103 Primary current buffer display
104 Primary charging voltage display
unit: µA
unit: V
To obtain the actual primary charging voltage, put the
indicated value into negative and subtract 1000.
105 Primary current display
106 Intensity display
unit: µA
unit: lux
To obtain the actual intensity (lux), divide the indi-
cated value by 100.
107 Jam history
See the next page.
108 Error history (E indications)
Indicates a history of the most recent ten errors. A
press on the ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’, ‘5’, ‘6’, ‘7’, ‘8’, ‘9’, or ‘0’
key on the numeric keypad will indicate the either of
most recent through tenth most recent error.
109 Fixing main thermistor (TH1) detection unit: °C
temperature
110 Fixing target temperature
112 AE sensor output
unit: °C
Normal if the value changes for each original when
making copies in AE.
113 ROM version No.
Indicates the parts revision number of the ROM.
Indicates the version of the program.
Normal if between ‘68’ and ‘72’.
114 ROM release No.
116 AE scan intensity display
120 Jam interval
121 Jam paper size data
123 Jam document handler copying data
Table 3-602
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
No. 101 Jam Location Display
The type of jam is indicated using the copy
counter.
LED (ON)
Type of jam
Pre-registration delay jam
Pre-registration stationary jam
Separation delay jam
LED (ON)
JD
Type of jam
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
JA
Jb
JC
Cassette 5 pick-up delay jam
Cassette 5 pick-up stationary jam
Duplexing unit inlet delay jam
Duplexing unit outlet delay jam
Duplexing unit registration delay jam
Duplexing unit inlet stationary jam
Vertical path roller 2 delay jam
Vertical path roller 1 delay jam
Vertical path roller 2 stationary jam
Vertical path roller 1 stationary jam
Deck outlet delay jam
JE
JF
Separation stationary jam
Delivery delay jam
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J16
J17
J25
Delivery stationary jam
Sorter jam
Door open jam
Cassette 3 pick-up delay jam
Cassette 3 pick-up stationary jam
Cassette 4 pick-up delay jam
Cassette 4 pick-up stationary jam
Jam due to electrical causes
(IE: Main power off during copy)
Table 3-603
Jam History
Table 3-604
No. 107
Apresson‘8’indicatestheeighthmostrecenterror.
A press on ‘9’ indicates the ninth most recent error.
Apresson‘10’indicatesthetenthmostrecenterror.
A press on the ‘1’ through ‘10’ on the numeric
keypad indicates the most recent ten jams.
A press on ‘1’ indicates the most recent jam.
Apresson‘2’indicatesthesecondmostrecentjam.
A press on ‘3’ indicates the third most recent jam.
A press on ‘4’ indicates the fourth most recent jam.
A press on ‘5’ indicates the fifth most recent jam.
A press on ‘6’ indicates the sixth most recent jam.
A press on ‘7’ indicates the seventh most recent jam.
A press on ‘8’ indicates the eighth most recent jam.
A press on ‘9’ indicates the ninth most recent jam.
A press on ‘10’ indicates the tenth most recent jam.
No. 108
Error History
A press on the ‘1’ through ‘10’ on the numeric
keypad indicates the most recent ten errors.
A press on ‘1’ indicates the most recent error.
A press on ‘2’ indicates the second most recent error.
A press on ‘3’ indicates the third most recent error.
A press on ‘4’ indicates the fourth most recent error.
A press on ‘5’ indicates the fifth most recent error.
A press on ‘6’ indicates the sixth most recent error.
Apresson‘7’indicatestheseventhmostrecenterror.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
No. 120 Jam interval indication
Service program 122 displays the drawer selec-
tion at jam occurrence:
By pushing key
Jam interval indication 120
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
First lates jam interval.
Second latest jam interval.
Third latest jam interval.
Fourth latest jam interval.
Fifth latest jam interval.
Sixth latest jam interval.
Seventh latest jam interval.
Eigth latest jam interval.
Nineth latest jam interval.
Tenth latest jam interval.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Upper drawer.
Lower drawer.
Stack bypass.
Optional 1st drawer.
Optional 2nd drawer.
Optional 3rd drawer.
Optional deck.
Duplex unit.
Table 3-607
Service program 123 displays if Document Han-
dlerwasusedforcopyingatjamoccurrence(1=DH
used)
Table 3-605
It displays the number of copies made (in tens:
1 to 999) between two jams occurence.
No. 121 Jam paper size data indication
No. 122 Jam drawer selection data indication
No. 123 Jam Document Handler copying data
indication
By pushing key
Jam data indication
First lates jam data.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Second latest jam data.
Third latest jam data.
Fourth latest jam data.
Fifth latest jam data.
Sixth latest jam data.
Seventh latest jam data.
Eigth latest jam data.
Nineth latest jam data.
Tenth latest jam data.
Table 3-606
Service program 121 displays the paper size at
jam occurrence (B5, B5R, B4, A3, A4, A4R, A5,
A5R, A6R)
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
D. I/O Mode (‘2’)
• To start I/O display mode, press ‘2’ (numeric keypad) and then the AE key.
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.
• To deselect an item, press the Clear key.
• A press on the Start key while a description of the selected service mode is indicated will execute
appropriate copying operations.
No.
206
Item
Description
Fixing main thermistor (TH1)
voltage display
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.
207
Fixing sub thermistor (TH2) voltage
display
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.
208
210
AE sensor voltage display
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.
Multifeeder paper width sensor
voltage display
211
Light adjustment sensor voltage
display
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.
212
213
214
Copy density correction knob
Toner sensor detector
Port C digit 1 display
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.
Indicates the detected voltage in ‘0’ through ‘255’.
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input
port.
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
Port C digit 2 display
Port C digit 3 display
Port C digit 4 display
Port C digit 5 display
Port C digit 6 display
Port C digit 7 display
Port C digit 8 display
Port C digit P0 display
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input
port.
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input
port.
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input
port.
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input
port.
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input
port.
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input
port.
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input
port.
Starting the mode causes part of the copy count indica-
tor to turn ON, representing the I/O state of the input
port.
Table 3-608
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
No. 214, No. 215, No. 216, No. 217, and No. 218
No.
LED
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
Item
Description
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)
–
Cassette 3 paper present
Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (PS1cu)
Cassette 5 vertical path sensor (PS3cu)
Reserved
214
ON: connected
Total copy counter connection
Auto paper selection sensor 1
Cassette 2 connection
ON: paper present
1-g
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
ON: connected
Cassette 4/5 paper present
Cassette 4 vertical path sensor (PS6cu)
Deck right door open
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)
ON: light-blocking plate present (door closed)
ON: pushed
215
216
217
Service switch
Total copy counter connection
Auto paper selection sensor 2
Option counter connection
Cassette size 1 (cassette 1)
Cassette size 2 (cassette 1)
Cassette size 3 (cassette 1)
Cassette size 4 (cassette 1)
Power switch ON/OFF
ON: connected
ON: paper present
1-g
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
ON: connected
ON: light-blocking plate present
ON: light-blocking plate present
ON: light-blocking plate present
ON: light-blocking plate resent
ON: ON
Auto paper selection sensor 3
Cassette 1 paper present
Cassette size 1 (cassette 2)
Cassette size 2 (cassette 2)
Cassette size 3 (cassette 2)
Cassette size 4 (cassette 2)
Reserved
ON: paper present
1-g
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)
ON: light-blocking plate present
ON: light-blocking plate present
ON: light-blocking plate present
ON: light-blocking plate present
–
Auto paper selection sensor 4
Reserved
ON: paper present
1-g
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
–
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)
ON: light-blocking plate present (Paper present)
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)
See the table below.
Cassette size 1 (cassette 3)
Cassette size 2 (cassette 3)
Cassette size 3 (cassette 3)
Cassette size 4 (cassette 3)
Option cassette connection detection 1
Option cassette connection detection 2
Reserved
218
See the table below.
1-g
–
Table 3-609
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
No. 219, No. 220, and No. 221
No.
LED
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
Item
Cassette size 1 (cassette 4/5)
Cassette size 2 (cassette 4/5)
Cassette size 3 (cassette 4/5)
Cassette size 4 (cassette 4/5)
Option cassette connection detection 3
Option cassette connection detection 4
Reserved
Description
ON: light-blocking plate present
ON: light-blocking plate present
ON: light-blocking plate present
219
ON: light-blocking plate present
See the table below.
See the table below.
1-g
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
–
ON: connected
Option counter 1 detection
Option counter 2 detection
ON: connected
–
Reserved
220
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
ON: light-blocking plate present (door closed)
Right door open detection
Reserved
1-g
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
–
Multifeeder paper detection
Delivery sensor
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper present)
–
Reserved
221
ON: light-blocking plate present (paper absent)
Separation sensor
Control Card IV connection
Reserved
ON: connected
–
–
1-g
Reserved
Table 3-610
Service mode No. 218 Service mode No. 219
LED 1-e
OFF
ON
LED 1-f
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
LED 1-e
LED 1-f
No optional feeding unit.
×
ON
OFF
×
×
×
×
×
×
Optional deck feeding unit.
1-cassette optional feeding unit.
2-cassette optional feeding unit.
3-cassette optional feeding unit.
ON
OFF
ON
ON
×
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
No. 222 Port P0 Display
LED
Description
ON: paper present
Item
Registration sensor (PS6)
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
Delivery sensor (PS8)
ON: paper present
ON: at HP
Lens home position sensor (PS2)
Blanking shutter home position sensor (PS3)
Halogen lamp check signal
ON: at HP
OFF: E220 error
Heater ON detection (triac short circuit detection)
Composite power supply ACK
ON: hater ON detected
ON: acknowledged
1-g
Table 3-611
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
E. Adjustment Mode (‘3’)
• To start the mode, press ‘3’ on the numeric keypad and press the AE key.
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.
• To change the value, enter the appropriate value on the numeric keypad and then press the AE key.
• To deselect an item, press the Clear key.
• A press on the Start key will execute appropriate copying operations.
• If the number is negative, ‘%’ turns ON. To enter a negative number, press the % key and enter the
number on the numeric keypad.
Item
Description
No.
301
Settings
AE scan lamp intensity automatic
adjustment
AE mode copy density (developing
bias) reference point adjustment
default:
0
302
303
–26 ~ +26
–26 ~ +26
AE mode copy density (developing
bias) slope adjustment
See p. 3-129.
default:
0
0
Fixing heater temperature off set
default:
304
305
–50 ~ +50
0 ~ 63
Leading edge margin adjustment
(registration roller ON timing)
A higher setting delays the copy paper in
relation to the image, thereby decreasing
the margin.
default:
unit: 0.27 mm
30
Leading edge non-image width
adjustment (timing at which the
blanking open/close shutter is
closed)
A higher setting increases the leading edge
non-image width.
306
307
308
309
310
311
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 15
default:
38
unit: 0.27 mm
Page separation right side leading
edge registration adjustment (timing
at which the registration roller turns
ON)
A higher setting delays the copy paper in
relation to the image.
default:
28
unit: 0.27 mm
Page separation right side leading
edge margin (timing at which the
blanking shutter closes)
A higher setting increases the leading edge
margin.
default:
38
unit: 0.27 mm
Trailing edge fine adjustment
(timing at which the blanking open/
close shutter is opened)
A higher setting decreases the trailing edge
margin.
default:
36
unit: 0.27 mm
Multifeeder trailing edge margin
adjustment (timing at which the
blanking open/close shutter is
opened)
A higher setting decreases the trailing edge
margin.
default:
26
unit: 0.27 mm
Left/right margin adjustment
(DIRECT)
(home position for the blanking
slide shutter)
A higher setting increases both left and
right margins.
default:
9
unit: 0.27 mm
Table 3-612-1
Note: A press on the Start key when in No. 305, 306, 307, or 308 makes copies in the mode that has been
effective before the activation of the mode; when executing No. 307 or 308, it is recommended that
page separation mode be selected before activating service mode.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
No.
312
Item
Description
Settings
Left/right margin adjustment
(reduction; the movement of the
blanking slide shutter)
A higher setting increases both left and
right margins.
–10 ~ +10
default:
–2
unit: 0l.27 mm
313
314
315
Primary output voltage correction
(correction against the output
voltage determined on APVC)
Enter the value recorded on the label
attached to the drum cartridge whenever
you have replaced the drum cartridge.
–16 ~ +16
–40 ~ +40
–16 ~ +16
default:
–4
APVC measurement current shift
(correction against APVC results)
Enter the value recorded on the label
attached to the drum cartridge whenever
you have replaced the drum cartridge.
default:
–10
APVC measurement voltage
correction (correction against
measurement voltage added for
APVC)
default:
unit: 16 V
5
Execute it when replacing the composite
power supply, and enter the value indicated
on the label attached to the composite
power supply.
316
318
APVC measurement current
correction (correction against the
current value measured during
APVC)
default:
0
–10 ~ +10
–4 ~ +4
Execute it when replacing the composite
power supply, and enter the value indicated
on the label attached to the composite
power supply.
Transfer output voltage adjustment
(correction against the transfer
voltage determined by ATVC)
Execute when replacing the composite
power supply by converting the value
indicated on the label attached to the
composite power supply as follows:
default:
Value on label Input value
0
Value on label Input value
1
2
3
4
5
→
→
→
→
→
0
–1
–2
–3
–4
6
7
8
9
→
→
→
→
+1
+2
+3
+4
319
320
321
322
323
Multifeeder arch adjustment (timing
at which the pick-up roller is turned
OFF)
A higher setting increases arching.
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
default:
36
unit: 0.27 mm
Cassette 1/2 pick-up arch adjust-
ment (timing at which the pick-up
roller turns OFF)
A higher setting increases arching.
default:
32
unit: 0.27 mm
Cassette 3 pick-up arch adjustment
(timing at which the pick-up roller
turns OFF)
A higher setting increases arching.
default:
10
unit: 0.27 mm
Cassette 4 pick-up arch adjustment
(timing at which the pick-up roller
turns OFF)
A higher setting increases arching.
default:
10
unit: 0.27 mm
Cassette 5 pick-up arch adjustment
(timing at which the pick-up roller
turns OFF)
A higher setting increases arching.
default:
10
unit: 0.27 mm
Table 3-612-2
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
No.
Item
Settings
0 ~ 63
Description
324 Duplex paper stack timing
adjustment
A higher setting delays the ON timing.
unit: 0.27 mm
default:
32
325 Set-back roller reversal timing
adjustment
0 ~ 63
A higher setting delays the reversal timing.
unit: 0.27 mm
default:
32
326 Lamp intensity adjustment
40 ~ 200 For factory only.
default:
125
327 Duplexing unit inlet arch adjustment
0 ~ 63
A higher setting increases the arch.
default:
28
unit: 0.27 mm
328 Duplexing unit out let adjustment
0 ~ 63
A higher setting increases the arch.
default:
28
unit: 0.27 mm
Table 3-612-3
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
F. Operation/Inspection Mode (‘4’)
• To start inspection mode, press ‘4’ (numeric keypad) and then the AE key.
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.
• To execute the mode, press the Start key.
• To end the mode, press the Stop key, thereby returning to item selection.
• If the mode is designed to stop automatically, the machine will automatically return to item selection after
ending the mode.
No.
Item
Description
401 Developing assembly idle rotation
Execute the mode after supplying toner during installa-
tion work.
402 Primary roller cleaning
403 Transfer roller cleaning
406 Nip check
Use the mode when checking the nip or when adjusting
the pressure of the lower fixing roller.
407 Halogen lamp intensity adjusting
408 Scanning lamp ON check
Press the zoom +key or the zoom -key to change the
value.
A press on the Start key causes the lamp to turn ON for
about 2.2 sec. (later E220 error happens)
409 Control panel all ON
410 Scanner forward stop in AE
411 Pre-exposure lamp ON
412 APVC measuring
412 Drum setting
413 Cool drum setting
414 Automatic drum setting
415 Fixing offset adjustment
417 Jam history clear
Factory only
Factory only
418 Error history clear
419 Scanner AP initialization
450 Back-up RAM clear
See p. 3-133.
Table 3-613
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
G. Machine Settings Mode (‘5’)
• To start machine settings mode, press ‘5’ (numeric keypad) and then the AE key.
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.
• To change the value, enter the new value on the numeric keypad, and press the AE key.
• To deselect the item, press the Clear key.
• A press on the Start key will execute appropriate copying operations.
No.
Item
Description
501 Multifeeder paper width sensor
characteristics registration
See p. 3-131.
502 Copy density notation switch (9-/
17- step)
9-step:
17-step:
default:
0
1
0 (9-step)
503 Auto energy saver function deacti-
vation
• Entering ‘1’ on the numeric keypad causes the indica-
tion to change to ‘ON’, activating the auto energy
saver function.
• Entering ‘0’ on the numeric keypad causes the indica-
tion to change to ‘OFF, deactivating the function.
default:
activated
504 Copy count upper limit set
settings: 0 to 99
default:
0
When set to ‘0’, 100 copies.
505 Universal cassette paper size
storage (cassette 1)
See p. 3-132.
settings:
default:
0 to 14
0
506 Separation static eliminator output
voltage switch
0: 2 kV
1: 4 kV
default:
0
507 Fixing forced wait
Activating the item increases the time of initial rotation.
Activate it if the fixing on the first copy is poor because
of a low-temperature environment.
0:
1:
deactivated
activated
default:
0
Table 3-614-1
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
No.
509
Item
Description
Universal cassette paper size
storage (cassette 2)
settings: 0 to 14
default:
0
510
511
512
Universal cassette paper size
storage (cassette 3)
settings: 0 to 14
default:
0
Universal cassette paper size
storage (cassette 4)
settings: 0 to 14
default:
0
Universal cassette paper size
storage (cassette 5)
settings: 0 to 14
default:
0
Table 3-614-2
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
H. Counter Mode (‘6’)
• To start counter mode, press the ‘6’ key on the numeric keypad and press the AE key.
• To select an item, press the appropriate number on the numeric keypad and then the Start key.
• To deselect an item, press the Clear key.
• A press on the Start key while a description of the mode is indicated will execute appropriate copying
operations.
• To obtain the actual count, multiply the indicated value by 100.
No.
601
602
603
Item
Large copy counter
Small copy counter
Total copy counter
Description
Table 3-615
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
VII.SELF DIAGNOSIS
The microprocessor on the machine’s DC con-
troller is provided with a self diagnosis mechanism
which checks the condition of the machine (sensors
in particular) and indicates a code to identify the
error it detects.
Detecting an error associated with ‘E000’ will
automaticallyturnOFFthepower.(errorautopower-
off)
A. Copier Self Diagnosis
Possible cause
Code
Description
• Thermistor (TH1; displacement,
poor contact, short circuit)
• Fixing heater (H1; open circuit,
cracking)
• Thermal fuse (FU1; malfunction)
• DC controller (faulty)
• The detection temperature of the main
thermistor (TH1) does not reach 50°C 15 sec
after a press on the Copy Start key.
E000
E001
• Thermistor (TH1; short circuit)
• Triac (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
• The detection temperature of the main
thermistor (TH1) exceeds 225°C during
copying or stand-by.
• Thermistor (TH1; displacement,
poor contact, open circuit)
• Fixing heater (H1; open circuit,
cracking)
• Thermal fuse (FU1; activation)
• Triac (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
• The detection temperature of the main
thermistor (TH1) does not reach 155°C 25
sec after it has reached 50°C during copying.
E002
• Thermistor (TH1; displacement,
poor contact)
• Fixing heater (H1; open circuit,
cracking)
• The detection temperature of the main
thermistor (TH1) is less than 50°C after it has
reached 155°C during copying.
• Thermal fuse (FU1; activation)
• Triac (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
E003
• Triac (faulty)
• Heater ON PCB (faulty)
The activation of fixing heater (HTON=1) is
detected when the fixing heater drive signal is
OFF (HTRD=0).
E004
E010
• Main motor (M1; faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
The revolution of the main motor deviates from
the specified value (MLOCK=0) for 1 sec or
more while the main motor drive signal remains
ON (MMD=1).
• Counter (open circuit)
• DC controller (faulty)
A check is made immediately before the
counter turns ON or OFF and when starting the
count.
Normal if the drive signal is ‘0’ when the
counter turns ON. Normal if the drive signal is
‘0’ when the counter is OFF.
Note: The check is made only if the counter is
installed.
E030
E041
• Deck motor (M1dk; faulty)
• Deck lifter clutch (CL4dk; faulty)
• Lifter sensor (PS3dk; faulty)
The lifter does not reach the lifter sensor
(PS3dk) within 40 sec after the deck lifter
clutch (CL4dk) has turned ON.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Possible cause
Description
Code
• Composite power supply (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
The output value is different from the setting for
the high-voltage output of the composite power
supply.
E064
E202
• Scanner cable (displacement,
tear)
• Scanner home position sensor
(PS1; faulty)
• Scanner motor (M2; faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
The scanner does not return to home position
within 5 sec when scanning operation is
started.
‘E002’ may be checked in service mode No.
108.
(control panel
keys locked)
• Lens cable (displacement, tear)
• Lens home position sensor (PS2;
faulty)
• Slide shutter (faulty movement)
• Blanking shutter home position
sensor (PS3; faulty)
• The lens home position signal (LHP) is not
generated within a specific period of time
after the power switch has been turned ON.
• The lens home position signal (LHP) is being
generated for more than a specific period of
time.
E210
• Change solenoid (SL1; faulty)
• Lens motor (M3; faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
• The blank shutter home position signal
(BSHP) is not generated when the slide
shutter is moved.
• Scanning lamp (faulty)
• Composite power supply (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
• Activation of the lamp is detected during
standby more than 22 sec.
E220
E240
E260
• DC controller (faulty)
• Composite power supply (faulty)
An error is detected in the communication
between the CPU (Q301) on the DC controller
and the CPU (U402) on the composite power
supply.
• Power supply cooling fan (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
The power supply cooling fan (FM3) remains
stationary for 10 sec or more because of an
error.
The intervals of the zero-cross signal deviates
from the tolerance.
• Power supply frequency (fluctua-
tion)
E261
E710
E712
• Composite power supply (faulty)
Initialization of the IPC (Q311) fails at power-
on.
• DC controller (faulty)
An error in the communication with the DF
cannot be removed.
• DC controller (faulty)
• DF controller(faulty)
• Connector (poor contact)
• Communication with ASSIST after connec-
tion fails.
• A break is detected with ASSIST.
• DC controller (faulty)
• ASSIST controller (faulty)
• Communication with ASSIST
(faulty)
E717
E802
The relay (KI) does not turn off when the power
switch is turned off (ACOFF=0).
• Composite power supply (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Initializing Back-Up Error Codes
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
actuator.
2) While holding down the service mode switch
(SW850) on the DC controller, turn the power
switch OFF/ON.
If the self-diagnosis mechanism has turned ON,
you can reset the machine by turning OFF and then
ON the power switch, unless the error is repre-
sented by ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, “E003', or ‘E004’.
Thisistopreventtheuserfromresettingthemachine
thereby damaging the fixing assembly.
3) When the power has been removed in about 2
sec, turn ON the power switch once again.
If ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, “E003', or ‘E004’ is
indicated,removethecauseoftheerrorandperform
the following:
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
B. Self Diagnosis on the Cassette Feeding Unit
Code
Cause
Description
• Cassette feeding unit control- • The motor clock signal is not detected
ler (faulty)
• Cassette feeding unit motor
(faulty)
within 1 sec after the pedestal motor
drive signal has been generated.
E901
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
C. RDF/ADF Self Diagnosis
Code
Cause
Description
• Data communication with
copier (faulty)
• Communication breaks for 5 sec or
more. (The communication is monitored
at all times.)
E400
• Pick-up motor (faulty)
• Pick-up roller home position
sensor (faulty)
• The state of the sensor remains un-
changed even after the pick-up motor
has been driven for 2 sec or more.
E401
• Belt motor (faulty)
• Belt motor clock sensor
(S11; faulty)
• The number of belt motor clock pulses is
below a specific value for 100 ms.
E402
E403
• Feeding motor (faulty)
• Slip sensor (faulty)
• The number of slip clock pulses is below
a specific value for 100 ms.
• Delivery motor (faulty)
• Delivery motor clock sensor
(faulty)
• The number of delivery motor clock
pulses is below a specific value for 200
ms.
E404
E411
• Registration sensor (faulty)
• Original sensor (faulty)
• The output of each sensor in the ab-
sence of paper is more than a specific
value.
Caution:
1. When the self-diagnosis mechanism has turned ON, you may reset the machine by turning OFF and
then ON the copier’s power switch.
2. You may make copies even while the RF remains out of order by placing originals on the copy paper.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
D. Sorter Self Diagnosis
Code
Cause
Description
• CPU or communication IC on • An error has been detected in the
sorter controller (faulty)
communication between the sorter and
the copier.
E500
E510
E530
• Feeding motor (fails to
rotate)
• The clock signal from the motor is
absent for 250 ms or more.
• Staple guide bar swing motor • The home position sensor does not turn
(fails to rotate)
OFF after generating the motor drive
signals for 2560 pulses.
• Stapler unit swing motor
(fails to rotate)
• The stapler unit swing motor sensor
does not turn OFF within 500 ms after
the motor drive signal has been gener-
ated.
E531
• The sensor does not turn ON within
1000 ms after the stapler unit swing
sensor has turned OFF.
• Bin shift motor (fails to
rotate)
• The lead cam home position sensor
does not turn OFF within 2000 ms after
the motor drive signal has been gener-
ated.
• The lead cam home position sensor
does not turn ON within 2000 ms after
the lead cam home position sensor has
turned OFF.
E540
E541
• Bin motor (faulty)
• Lead cam drive gear (dis-
placement)
• The lead cam position sensor does not
turn ON within 10 sec after the lead cam
position sensor has turned OFF.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
VIII. STANDARDS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
2
Adjusting the Scanning Lamp
Intensity
Select service mode No. 407.
1) Place the Test Sheet NA3 on the copyboard,
and close the copyboard cover.
2) Turn OFF AE, and make copies in continuous
mode at copy density 5 and VR850 (DC bias) at
center.
3) Press the zoom + keys or zoom - key so that the
optimum image is obtained.
A. Electrical
1
Adjustment after Replacing
PCBs
You must perform the following adjustments
whenever you have replaced the following PCBs:
• If the image is too light, press the zoom + key.
• If the image is too dark, press the zoom - key.
a. DC Controller PCB
1) Start service mode (adjustment mode [3]), and
enter the settings indicated on the Service
Mode label attached behind the front door.
2) Perform the multifeeder paper width sensor
adjustment.
3) Perform scanning lamp intensity adjustment.
4) Perform AE adjustment.
As necessary, change the settings of service
mode and user mode.
Reference:
1. What is referred to as optimum image is an
image in which gray scale No. 8 on the copy
corresponds to gray scale No. 4 through
No. 7 on the Test sheet while the copy is
free of fogging.
2. TurningtheVRexcessivelycancauseE220
to be displayed. If this is the case, turn the
VR 301 to the center position, turn OFF/ON
the power, and make adjustments once
again.
Caution:
If you changed any of the settings indicated in
the Service Mode label, be sure to record the
new settings on the label.
Caution:
Aftermakingtheadjustment, besuretoperform
AE adjustment.
b. Composite Power Supply PCB
1) Select service mode No. 315 through No. 318
(adjustment mode [3]), and enter the settings
indicatedonthelabelattachedtothecomposite
power supply PCB.
3
AE Adjustment
PerformAEadjustmentusingthefollowingthree
service modes:
q AE Basic Adjustment
Be sure to record any new settings in the Ser-
vice Mode label.
No. 410 scanner forward stop
c. AE Sensor PCB
No. 408 scanning lamp ON check
No. 208 AE sensor voltage display
No. 301 AE scan lamp intensity automatic ad-
justment
1) Perform AE adjustment.
Caution:
If you changed any of the settings indicated in
the Service Mode label, be sure to record the
new settings on the label.
w No. 302 AE mode copy density (developing
bias) reference adjustment
e No. 303 AE mode copy density (developing
bias) slope adjustment
If the copy density is not optimum after perform-
ing AE basic adjustment q No. 410, No. 408, No.
208, and No. 301, try w No. 302 and e No. 303 in
sequence.
d. Light Adjustment Sensor PCB
1) Perform scanning lamp intensity adjustment.
2) Perform AE adjustment.
Caution:
If you changed any of the settings indicated in
the Service Mode label, be sure to record the
new settings on the label.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
If you have replaced the AE sensor, scanning
lamp, or DC controller or if you performed scanning
lamp intensity adjustment (VR301), you must per-
form
9) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘0’ through ‘255’.
10) Adjust VR860/851 on the Service switch PCB
so that the display indicates ‘100’ through ‘105’.
11) Turn OFF/ON the power switch.
• This turns OFF the scanning lamp and turns
ON the power once again.
12) Press the service mode switch.
• The machine starts service mode and indi-
cates ‘1’.
• AE basic adjustment,
• No. 410 scanning forward stop,
• No. 408 scanning lamp ON check,
• No. 208 AE sensor voltage indication, and
• No.301AEscanninglampintensityautomatic
adjustment.
Go through the steps that follow when making
these adjustments. Table 3-801 gives a list of three
service modes excluding No. 408 scanning lamp
ON check and No. 208 AE sensor voltage indica-
tion.
13) Press ‘3’ on the numeric keypad, and press the
AE key.
• The display indicates ‘301’.
14) Press the Start key.
Caution:
a. AE Basic Adjustment (No. 410, No. 408,
No. 208, No. 301)
Wait until initial rotation ends.
In this adjustment, the intensity of the scanning
lamp is read by the lamp intensity sensor, and the
voltage of the AE sensor unit is adjusted using
VR860/851 on the service switch PCB.
After making the adjustment, you must perform
AE scan lamp intensity automatic adjustment.
1) Place the Test Sheet NA-3 on the copyboard,
and close the copyboard.
Press the service mode switch (SW850) to start
service mode.
2) Press ‘4’ on the numeric keypad, and press the
AE key.
• After initial rotation, the AE indicator starts to
flash.
15) Press the AE key so that the following takes
place to perform automatic adjustment.
• The AE indicator stops flashing and remains
ON.
• The scanner moves to the AE measurement
point.
• When the intensity has stabilized, the reading
of the AE sensor is stored.
• ThelampturnsOFF, andthescannerreturns.
16) After the above ends, press the Clear key twice.
• The display indicates ‘3’.
17) Press ‘1’ on the numeric keypad, and press the
AE key.
• The display indicates ‘1’.
18) Press ‘116’ on the numeric keypad, and press
the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘401’.
3) Press ‘410’ on the numeric keypad.
• The machine indicates ‘410’.
4) Press the Start key once.
• The scanner moves forward.
Caution:
• Make sure that the display indicates ‘68’
through ‘72’. If not, start with step 2) of opera-
tion/inspection mode and make adjustments
once again.
Each press on the Start key causes the scanner
to move forward. Be sure not to press it more
than once.
5) Press ‘408’ on the numeric keypad, and press
the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘ON’, and the scanning
lamp turns ON about 1.5 sec later.
6) Press the Clear key twice.
• The display indicates ‘4’.
b. AE Mode Copy Density (developing bias)
Reference Point Adjustment (No. 302)
1) If the display does not indicate ‘300’s’, start
adjustment mode of service mode as you would
for No. 301.
2) Press ‘2’ on the numeric keypad.
• The display indicates ‘302’.
3) Press the Start key.
7) Press ‘2’ on the numeric keypad, and press the
AE key.
• The display indicates ‘201’.
8) Press ‘208’ on the numeric keypad.
• The machine indicates ‘208’.
• The display indicates the current setting.
4) Change the setting using the numeric keypad,
and press the AE key.
• To increase the setting, press the AE key.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
• default:
0
settings: –26 to +26
• If the value is negative, ‘%’ is turned ON. To
enter a negative value, press the ‘%’ key
before entering the value.
• TheindicationstopsflashingandremainsON
when the value has been stored.
5) RecordthenewadjustmentvalueintheService
Mode label.
6) Press the Clear key.
• The machine returns to item selection and
indicates ‘302’.
• As necessary, perform No. 303.
c. AE Mode Copy Density (developing bias)
Slope Adjustment (No. 303)
1) If the display does not indicate ‘300’s’, start
adjustment mode in service mode as you would
for No. 301.
2) Press ‘3’ on the numeric keypad.
• The display indicates ‘303’.
3) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates the current setting.
4) Change the value using numeric keypad, and
press the AE key.
• A higher setting produces lighter AE copies.
• default:
0
settings: –26 to +26
• If the value is negative, ‘%’ is turned ON. To
enter a negative value, press the ‘%’ key
before entering the value.
• TheindicationstopsflashingandremainsON
when the value has been stored.
5) Record any new settings in the Service Mode
label.
6) Press the Reset key.
• The machine ends service mode.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Item
Function
Description
Remarks
No. 301 Automatic lamp
intensity adjustment
for AE scans
The lamp intensity is
automatically adjusted so
that the copies of the
Test Chart will be made
at density 5.
9
Lighter
Copy
density 5
Darker
Test Chart
Density of
original
No. 302 Copy density (devel-
opment bias) refer-
q A lower setting in
service mode causes
the AE copies to be
darker.
w A higher settings in
service mode causes
the AE copies to be
lighter.
q
w
ence point adjustment
for AE mode
9
Lighter
Copy
density 5
Darker
default: 0
range: –26 to +26
(see Note.)
Density of
original
Test Chart
No. 303 Copy density (devel-
opment bias) slope
adjustment for AE
mode
q A higher setting in
service mode causes
copies of a newspa-
per to be lighter.
w A lower setting in
service mode causes
copies of a newspa-
per to be darker.
q
w
9
Lighter
Copy
density 5
Darker
News- Density of
paper original
Test Chart
default: 0
range: –26 to +26
Table 3-801
Note: 1. After Adjustment, with test chart NA-3, using AE mode, density adjustment should show ‘5’.
2. In non-AE mode, using NA-3, density ‘5’ must be appropriate (adjusted with VR850).
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Numeric
keypad
Display
Remarks
4
Multifeeder Paper Width Sensor
Adjustment
In this adjustment, you will be storing the char-
acteristics of the multifeeder paper width sensor
using service mode No. 501.
Perform the adjustment if you have replaced the
sensor or if the machine wrongly identifies paper
sizes.
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
actuator into the door switch.
2) Press the service mode switch (SW850) with a
hex key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A3
Ldr
b4
A3
Ledger
B4
LGL
A4r
b5r
A5r
Sr
Legal
A4R
B5R
• The machine starts service mode and indi-
cates ‘1’.
3) Press ‘5’ on the numeric keypad.
• The display indicates ‘5’.
A5R
Statement R
4) Press the AE key.
JPC
Japanese governmen-
tal postcard (100 wide)
• The machine starts machine settings mode
and indicates ‘501’.
5) Press the Start key.
0
CLr
Clear
• The display indicates ‘A3’.
(clears stored settings)
6) Selecttheappropriatepapersize(exceptCLR).
(A press on the numeric keypad brings out a list
shown in Table 3-802.)
Table 3-802
• If you select a size not stored, the display will
start to flash.
Reference:
1. IfyouarestoringthesizeunderNo. 9(JPC),
adjust the guides so that they are closest.
2. At time of shipment from the factory, A3,
A4RandJPC(NorthAmericamodel:11×17,
LGL and Sr) are pre-stored, and the char-
acteristic curves of these three sizes are
computed and the results are used for
identification of paper sizes. If you enter a
size other than these three in the field, the
machinewillcomputeacharacteristiccurve
with the addition of the data obtained from
the new size. For this reason, it is best to
store the sizes of the papers the user tends
to use frequently.
• If you press the Start key when ‘CLR’ is
indicated, all stored settings will be cleared
and returned to default settings.
7) Adjust the guide of the multifeeder to suit the
size you are setting.
• Make sure you feel a click when positioning
the guide.
8) Press the AE key.
• Whenthesettinghasbeenstored, thedisplay
stops flashing and remains ON.
9) Press the Reset key.
• The machine ends service mode.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Numeric
keypad
5
Setting the Paper Size for the
Universal Cassette
Size (mm)
Paper
Bolivian
355.0 × 216.0
0
1
2
3
You will be using service mode to set the paper
size that is effective when the paper size lever of the
cassette is positioned for the universal cassette.
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
actuator into the door switch.
2) Press the service mode switch (SW850) with a
hex key.
• The machine starts service mode and indi-
cates ‘1’.
3) Press ‘5’ on the numeric keypad.
• The display indicates ‘5’.
OFFICIO
340.0 × 220.0
340.0 × 220.0
337.0 × 206.0
Argentine
OFFICIO
Argentine
LEGAL
Australian
FOOLSCAP
330.2 × 215.9
330.0 × 210.0
330.2 × 203.2
4
5
6
FOOLSCAP
FOLIO
4) Press the AE key.
• The machine starts machine settings mode
and indicates ‘501’.
5) Using the numeric keypad, select the appropri-
ate cassette holder.
Government
LEGAL
320.0 × 220.0
7
Ecuadorian
OFFICIO
For example, select cassette 1 by pressing ‘0’
and ‘5’.
6) Press the Start key.
317.0 × 216.0
280.0 × 220.0
8
9
OFFICIO
• Thedisplayindicatesthenumbercorrespond-
ing to the universal cassette currently set.
7) According to Table 3-803, select the size you
want to store using the numeric keypad.
8) Press the AE key to store the setting.
9) Press the Reset key.
Argentine LET-
TER-R
268.0 × 190.0
266.7 × 203.2
220.0 × 280.0
203.2 × 266.7
190.0 × 268.0
10
11
12
13
14
Korean Govern-
ment-R
• The machine ends service mode.
Government
LETTER-R
Cassette holder
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Cassette 5
Service mode No.
No. 505
Argentine LET-
TER
Government
LETTER
No. 509
No. 510
Korean
Government
No. 511
Table 3-804
No. 512
Table 3-803
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
6
Initializing the Back-Up RAM
7
Checking the Photointerrupters
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch
actuator into the door switch.
2) Press the service mode switch (SW850) with a
hex key.
The machine’s photointerrupters may be
checked using a conventional meter or in service
mode.
q Using a Meter
• The machine enters service mode and indi-
cates ‘1’.
3) Press ‘4’ on the numeric keypad.
• The display indicates ‘4’.
1) Set the meter to the 12VDC range.
2) Connect the - probe of the tester to J301-4
(GND) of the DC controller.
3) Make checks as indicated.
1: 5 V
4) Press the AE key.
• Themachinestartsoperation/inspectionmode
and indicates ‘401’.
0: 0 V
w Using Service Mode
5) Press ‘5’ and ‘0’ on the numeric keypad.
• The display indicates ‘450’.
6) Press the Start key.
• The display changes to ‘EE’.
8) Press the Start key.
• The display returns to ‘EE’.
9) Turn OFF/ON the power switch.
• The back-up RAM is initialized and set to
default settings.
1) Open the front door, and insert the door
switch actuator into the door switch.
2) Press the service mode switch (SW850)
with a hex key.
3) Press ‘2’ on the numeric keypad.
• The display indicates ‘2’.
4) Press the AE key.
• The machine enters I/O display mode
and indicates ‘201’.
5) Enter the appropriate number using the
numeric key, and press the Start key.
• Check each photointerrupter with refer-
ence to the copy count indicator.
Reference:
TostopinitializingtheRAM, presstheClearkey
and then the Reset key.
To stop it after performing step 8), press the
start key, and press the Start key after the
display has indicated ‘nop’.
2-a
1-a
2-f
2-g
2-e
1-f
1-g
1-e
2-b
1-b
2-c
1-c
2-d
Figure 3-801
1-d
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3–134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
1.
Before disassembly or reassembly work, disconnect the heating (if a heater is installed)
and main body power cord(s).
2. Group the screws by type (length and diameter) and location.
3. The fixing screw for the grounding wire and varistors is fitted with a washer to ensure
electric continuity; be sure to use the washer for reassembly.
4. If possible, avoid operating the machine with any of its parts removed.
5. Unless otherwise noted, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly.
I. EXTERNALS ............................................. 4-1
A. External Covers ................................... 4-1
B. Control Panel ....................................... 4-2
C. Removing the Display Panel ............... 4-2
D. Fan ...................................................... 4-3
E. Counter ................................................ 4-4
II. DRIVE SYSTEM ........................................ 4-5
A. Scanner Drive System......................... 4-5
B. Lens Drive Assembly......................... 4-10
C. Main Motor......................................... 4-14
III. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ................. 4-15
A. Pick-Up Assembly ............................. 4-15
B. Multifeeder Assembly ........................ 4-17
C. Registration Roller Assembly ............ 4-20
D. Feeding Assembly ............................. 4-22
E. Delivery Assembly ............................. 4-22
F. Duplexing Assembly .......................... 4-23
G. Cassette Unit ..................................... 4-24
H. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ................... 4-27
IV. EXPOSURE SYSTEM............................. 4-34
A. Illuminating Assembly........................ 4-34
V. CHARGING SYSTEM ............................. 4-38
A. Drum Unit .......................................... 4-38
B. Primary Charging Assembly.............. 4-39
C. Transfer Charging Assembly............. 4-40
D. Drum Heater ...................................... 4-41
VI. DEVELOPING SYSTEM ......................... 4-42
VII. FIXING SYSTEM ..................................... 4-45
VIII.ELECTRICAL........................................... 4-50
A. DC Controller PCB ............................ 4-50
B. Composite Power Supply PCB ......... 4-50
C. AE Sensor PCB ................................. 4-51
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
Note:
I. EXTERNALS
Remove the covers as necessary to clean,
inspect, or repair the inside of the machine.
Those covers that may be detached by merely
removing their mounting screws are left out of
the discussions.
A. External Covers
1
2
10
9
When installing the copyboard glass, be sure to
butt it against the vertical size plate so that no gap
is left for intrusion of foreign matter.
3
4
5
8
7
6
q Copyboard cover
w Control panel
e Right cover
r Rear right cover
t Right door
y Front right cover
u Cassette
i Front door
o Size index
Figure 4-103
! Copyboard glass
Figure 4-101
14
13
11
12
! Left cover
! Lower left cover
! Lower rear cover
! Upper rear cover
Figure 4-102
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5
3
3
B. Control Panel
1. Removing the Control Panel
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Remove the upper left cover.
3) Open the front door.
4) Pull the open/close lever, and open the body.
5) Remove the right cover.
6) Remove the left cover.
7) Remove the four screws q, and remove the
inside cover w.
1
2
Figure 4-106
C. Removing the Display
Panel
1) Remove the display panel q using a pen or the
like.
1
1
Figure 4-104
8) Remove the screw e, and disconnect the four
connectors r (J801, J802, J803, J804); then,
remove the control panel t.
4
4
3
3
Figure 4-107
Figure 4-105
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5) Holding the exhaust fan assembly r, pull it off
D. Fan
to the front.
1. Removing the Exhaust Fan
1) Open the front door.
2) Pull the open/close door, and open the body.
3) Remove the relay connector q.
4
1
Figure 4-111
6) Remove the four screws t, and remove the air
conveyor y,.then remove the fan u together
with the two rubbers i.
Figure 4-108
4) Remove the screw w from the rear and the two
screws from the front e.
5
8
7
8
2
5
6
5
Figure 4-112
2. Removing the Scanner cooling fan
1) Open the front door.
2) Pull the open/close door, and open the body.
3) Remove the rear cover.
4) Remove the four screws q, and remove the
scanner cooling fan w.
Figure 4-109
1
2
3
1
Figure 4-110
Figure 4-113
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5) Install the counter mount to the copier with two
screws.
6) Connect the two connectors t of the counter.
E. Counter*
* This may not be available for sale in same areas.
1. Installing the Option Counter (CNT2)
1) Open the top body.
2) Remove the inside upper cover.
3) Remove the two screws w, and disconnect the
connector e; then, remove the counter mount
q.
1
3
5
Figure 4-116
7) Set SW303 on the DC controller as indicated in
Table 4-101.
2
Figure 4-114
4) Put the option counter r in the counter mount.
4
Figure 4-115
SW303
Counter
Description
2
1
Large size copy counter
Duplexing unit counter
Small size copy counter
No counter
SW303 settings determines
how the option counter (CNT2)
behaves.
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
1
2
1
2
1
Table 4-101
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
2. Removing the Scanner Cable
1) Remove the copyboard cover, right cover, left
cover, upper rear cover, and lower rear cover.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
3) Remove the control panel.
4) Remove the copyboard cover support q.
II. DRIVE SYSTEM
A. Scanner Drive System
1. Removing the Scanner Drive Motor
1) Remove the copy board glass.
2) Removethespringq,theEringw,thetensioner
e, and the belt r.
Scanner wire
3
1
1
2
4
Figure 4-201
3) Remove the upper rear cover.
4) Disconnect the connector t of the motor, and
remove the two screws y.
5) Remove the spring u and the scanner drive
motor i.
Figure 4-203
5) Remove the ten screws w, and remove the
upper left stay e.
2
2
6
8
6
5
7
2
3
2
Figure 4-204
Figure 4-202
6) Fix the cable in place using cable clips (FY9-
3010).
Caution:
When mounting the scanner driver motor, be
sure to make the appropriate adjustments as
follows:
1) Hookthespringu onthemetalplate, andfix
thescannerdrivermotorinplacewithscrews
y; then, give the screws y counterclock-
wise half turn to free it.
2) Push the motor down, and then shift it to the
left and right.
Figure 4-205
3) Where the motor stops, tighten the screws
y (on the right and then left).
4) Fit the tensioner e, and mount the spring q
and the E-ring w.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
7) Loosen the two screwsr, and loosen the cable
3. Assembling the Mirror Positioning
Tool
tension (both front and rear).
1) Remove the screw from position B.
4
B
A
A
B
Position B
Longest pin
Medium-Length pin
Figure 4-206
8) Move the No. 1 mirror mount in the forward
direction, and match the angular hole in the
front side panel and the cable fixing screw t.
Then, remove t to separate the No. 1 mirror
mount and the scanner cable (both front and
rear).
Figure 4-208
2) Put the screw removed in step 1) to position A;
then, tighten it slightly.
3) Pull the arm out of the main frame, and extend
it until it comes into contact with the stopper as
indicated in Figure 4-209.
4) Tighten the screw.
5
B
A
A
B
(front)
Position A
Figure 4-209
5
(rear)
Figure 4-207
9) Remove the pulley clip, and remove the scan-
ner cable (both front and rear).
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
4. Routing the Scanner Cable
Caution:
You must keep the mirror positioning tool (FY9-
3009) and the pulley clip (FY9-3010) near at
hand when routing the scanner cable.
Assemble the mirror positioning tool according
to “Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool” in
advance.
B
A
A
B
Figure 4-210
1) As in q, put the steel ball into the hole in the
pulley; then, wind the cable four times toward
the flange and nine times in the opposite direc-
tion. Thereafter, fix the cable using the pulley
clip.
2) As in w, set the mirror positioning tool between
the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror
mount.
3) As in e, loosen the screw on the mirror pulley
mount, and temporarily fix it on the left stay.
4) Asillustrated, routethescanningcable;hookt
on the side plate, and hook i on the tension
plate of the lens mount.
5) Tighten the screw loosened in e to fix it on the
left stay.
6) As in !, loosen the set screw once so that the
tension on the scanner cable is even through-
out; then, tighten the set screw.
7) As in !, fix the No. 1 mirror mount and the
scanner cable fixing in place.
8) As in o, adjust the cable spring using a ruler so
that its length is 34 ±1 mm.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
10
Set screws
Loosen the set
screws to enable
free rotation.
2
Put the steel ball
Pulley clip
Screw
Loosen the 3
screw,and shift
it down.
Attach the mirror
positioning tool.
into the hole in
the pulley; wind
the cable nine
times toward the
inside, and four
times toward the
outside; then, snap
on the pulley clip.
8
Steel ball
Re-tighten
the screw.
1
5
9
6
46.5~49mm
4
11
7
Figure 4-211
Caution:
When installing the cable spring, pay attention to the orientation of the spring. Be sure to install as
indicated; if installed in the wrong direction, the hook tip of the spring can interfere with the cable.
Hook
Cable
Cable spring
Cable spring
Hook
Cable
(front)
(rear)
Figure 4-212
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5) Install the metal fixing of the scanner cable to
the No. 1 mirror mount with two screws e(both
front and rear).
5. Adjusting the Mirror Position (opti-
cal length between No. 1 mirror and
No. 2 and No. 3 mirrors)
1) Keep the mirror positioning tool near at hand.
(See “Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool.”)
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount in the forward
direction, and match the angular hole in the
front side plate and the cable fixing screw q.
1
(front)
(rear)
1
Figure 4-215
6) Tighten the set screw of the pulley.
7) Remove the tool (FY9-3009).
(front)
(rear)
6. Cleaning the Scanner No. 6 Mirror
1) Open the front cover.
Figure 4-213
2) Operate the open/close lever to open the body.
3) Remove the dust-proofing glass q and the
dust-proofing mirror cover w.
3) Loosen the set screw of the pulley.
4) Set the mirror positioning tool w between the
No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror mount
(both front and rear).
Mirror positioning tool (rear)
Mirror positioning tool (front)
(front)
(front)
1
2
(front)
(front)
Figure 4-216
Figure 4-214
4) Using a blower brush or lint-free paper moist-
ened with alcohol, clean the No. 6 mirror.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
6) Disconnectthetwoconnectorsyfromtherear.
B. Lens Drive Assembly
1. Removing the Lens Drive Motor
1) Remove the upper rear cover and the right
glass retainer.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
3) Move the No. 1 mirror assembly qto the left.
4) Remove the two screws w, and remove the
lens cover e.
6
2
Figure 4-219
7) Remove the two screws u, and remove the
lens drive unit i.
2
1
3
8
(front)
Figure 4-217
5) Loosen the tension on the spring r, and re-
move the cable t.
7
5
Figure 4-220
4
Figure 4-218
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
8) Remove the two screws o, and disconnect the
connector !; then, remove the lens motor !.
Caution:
When removing the screw o, disconnect the
connector !first to avoid contact between the
harness and the driver.
10
9
11
Figure 4-221
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
2. Routing the Lens Cable
SL
2
Turn clockwise
3 times.
1
3
Figure 4-222 Lens Drive Assembly
1) Stop the lens cable at each pulley q, and wind
it around the pulley w.
2) Move the tension pulley e, and attach the
cable.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
3. Positioning the Change Solenoid
Loosen the two screws tto adjust so that the gear rmoves through the arm ein the direction of b until
it stops when the steel core qof the solenoid is fully pushed in the direction of B, i.e., when the E-ring whas
come into contact with the solenoid.
3
1
5
a
b
2
4
B
A
Figure 4-223
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
C. Main Motor
1. Removing the Main Motor Unit
1) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove
the three mounting screws w; then, remove the
main motor unit e.
1
3
2
2
Figure 4-224
2. Routing the Drive Belt
Route the drive belt over the pulley and the tensioner as indicated.
Drive belt
Pulley
Tensioner
Figure 4-225
Vertical path roller gear
Main motor
Tensioner
Vertical path roller
clutch (CL7)
Figure 4-226
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller
1) Removethepick-uprollerunit. (See“Removing
the Pick-Up Roller Unit.”)
2) Remove the E-ring q, bushing w, spacer 1 e
and spacer 2 r; then, remove the pick-up roller
t.
III. PICK-UP/FEEDING
SYSTEM
A. Pick-Up Assembly
1. Removing the Pick-Up Roller Unit
1) Remove the lower rear cover.
2) Remove the grip ring q, and remove the pick-
up clutch w.
1
5
4
3
2
Reference:
When removing the pick-up clutch, pull it off
after matching the cut-off e in the gear of the
clutch against the turn stop.
Figure 4-303
Caution:
Take care not to lose the pins from its front and
rear.
3. Points to Note When Installing the
Pick-Up Roller
Installthepick-uprollerqsothatthemarkingw
shown in Figure 4-304 is at the rear. (However, the
parallel pin will not fit in the groove.)
1
2
3
Figure 4-301
3) Pull out the cassettes.
4) Remove the E-ring rand the bushing t; then,
remove the pick-up roller unit y.
2
1
5
Figure 4-304
4
6
Figure 4-302
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
4. Removing the Separation Pad
1) Fully open the right door. (Remove the tension
tape from the door.)
5. AdjustingtheLeft/RightRegistration
Make adjustments so that the image position is
as indicated in Figure 4-308 when the Test Sheet is
copied in Direct.
Caution:
Take care not to open the right door exces-
sively.
a. Pick-Up from the Cassette
Turn the screw q shown in Figure 4-307 to
adjust the position of the cassette hook plate.
standards: 0 ± 1.5 mm
2) Remove the front right cover.
3) Remove the vertical path guide q (upper; four
screws).
•
CW direction: moves the paper in the direc-
tion of – in Figure 4-308
•
CCW direction:moves the paper in the direc-
tion of + in Figure 4-308
1
1
Figure 4-307
Figure 4-305
(-)
(+)
0±1.5mm
4) Remove the two screws w, and remove the
separation pad unit e.
3
0
2
4
6
8
10
Figure 4-308
2
Figure 4-306
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5) Shift the multifeeder pick-up roller unit y to-
B. Multifeeder Assembly
ward the rear, and remove it.
1. Removing the Multifeeder Pick-up
Roller Unit
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the E-ring q, and pull out the bushing
w.
3) Remove the two screws e.
1
2
3
6
Figure 4-311
2. Removing the Multifeeder Pick-Up
Roller
1) Removethemultifeederpick-uprollerunit.(See
“RemovingtheMultifeederPick-UpRollerUnit.”)
2) Remove the stop ring (plastic) q, and remove
the pick-up roller wtogether with its collar.
Figure 4-309
4) Remove the screw r, and remove the roller
cover t.
Caution:
5
Take care not to lose the pin from the rear.
4
1
2
Figure 4-312
Figure 4-310
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
3. Points to Note When Installing the
Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller
5. Removing the Multifeeder Spring
Clutch
When installing the multifeeder pick-up rollerq,
make sure that the side with a cross won the collar
is toward the rear.
1) Removetheupperrearcoverandthelowerrear
cover.
2) Remove the three screws q, and shift the cord
guide w.
1
2
1
2
(front of copier)
1
Figure 4-313
Figure 4-315
4. Removing the Separation Pad
1) Open the upper right door.
3) Remove the main motor. (See “Removing the
Main Motor.”)
2) Remove the two screws q, and remove the
separation pad w.
4) Remove the three screws e, then, remove the
clutch stop plate yand the clutche u.
Caution:
Take care so that the spring on the separation
pad assembly will not fly off.
1
6
7
2
3
Figure 4-314
3
Figure 4-316
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5) RemovethetwoE-ringsi, andremovethetwo
bushings o.
6) Remove the spring !of the actuator.
7) Remove the three screws !, and remove the
solenoid mounting plate !.
6. Positioning the Multifeeder Assem-
bly Paper Guide Plate Cam
Temporarily fix the screw with a hex nut of the
spring clutch assembly, and turn the control ring. At
this time, make adjustments so that the hole in the
cam and the hole (or black dot) in the multifeeder
drive unit match while the claw of the control ring is
in contact with the solenoid plate.
9
8
11
8
9
10
11
Holes (or hole and black dot) matched
12
11
Horizontal line
Figure 4-317
Caution:
Takecaresothattheplungerofthesolenoidwill
not fall.
Gear
Control ring
Screw w/hex nut
8) Loosen the hex nut !, and remove the spring
clutch !.
Claw
14
Solenoid plate
Gear
Paper guide plate cam
13
Figure 4-319
Figure 4-318
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
Caution:
C. Registration Roller Assem-
bly
If the adjusting hole is not furnished with a black
dot for reference, make adjustments as in-
structed while making sure that the paper guide
plate cam of the multifeeder aseembly is lo-
cated as shown.
1. Removing the Registration Clutch
1) Remove the lower rear cover.
2) Remove the clip ring q, and disconnect the
connector w; then, remove the registration
clutch e.
2
Paper guide
plate cam
130.5±0.5mm
Hole
1
3
Figure 4-320
Figure 4-322
7. AdjustingtheLeft/RightRegistration
If the left/right registration is wrong when using
the multifeeder, loosen the screws qto adjust the
tray position.
2. Removing the Upper Registration
Roller
1) Remove the registration clutch. (See “Remov-
ing the Registration Clutch.”)
2) Remove the springs (front) qand (rear) w.
1
Figure 4-321
1
8. Points to Note When Installing the
Multifeeder Assembly Rack Plate
Install the multifeeder rack plate to the pulley
with both left and right rack plates fully open.
Figure 4-323
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
3. Removing the Lower Registration
Roller
2
1) Remove the E-ring (front) q, and shift the
bushing w.
2) Remove the registration roller e.
2
3
Figure 4-324
Caution:
At this time, take care so that the springs at the
front and the rear will not fly away.
3) Removetheupperregistrationroller ebylifting
it.
1
Figure 4-326
3
Figure 4-325
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
D. Feeding Assembly
E. Delivery Assembly
1. Removing the Feeding Belt
1) Remove the mounting screw w, and remove
the feeding center guide w.
1. Removing the Delivery Roller
1) Open the top body.
2) Remove the E-ring q.
2) Pull the feeding roll etoward the fixing assem-
bly, and remove it.
3) Shift the bushings (rear) wand (front) e; then,
remove the delivery roller r.
3) Remove the feeding roll r, and remove the
feeding belt t.
4
2
1
3
4
4
5
5
Figure 4-329
1
2
3
3
Figure 4-327
Caution:
Do not touch the transfer roller. Take care not to
damage the joint between the feeding rolls.
2. Removing the Feeding Fan
1) Remove the feeding belt. (See “Removing the
Feeding Belt.”)
2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and
remove the feeding fan w.
1
2
1
Figure 4-328
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
3) Remove the lower rear cover.
4) Disconnect the connectors (J325, J326) r.
F. Duplexing Assembly
1. Removing the Duplexing Assembly
Inlet Unit
4
1) Remove the left cover.
2) Remove the delivery roller.
3) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the
duplexing unit winlet unit.
Figure 4-332
5) Remove the two mounting screws t, and re-
move the duplexing unit y.
1
2
Figure 4-330
6
2. Removing the Duplexing Unit
1) Remove the front door, two cassettes and the
front left cover.
2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and
disconnect the connector w; then, remove the
paper size detection unit 1 e.
2
3
5
Figure 4-333
1
1
Figure 4-331
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
3) Remove the bushing wof the pick-up roller unit
ewhile pushing it down toward the left.
G. Cassette Unit
1. Removing the Copier from the Cas-
sette Unit
1) Disconnect the copier’s power plug.
2) Disconnect the cassette unit connector qfrom
the copier.
3
2
Figure 4-336
1
3. Removing the Pick-Up Roller
1) Removethepick-uprollerunit. (See“Removing
the Pick-Up Roller Unit.”)
Figure 4-334
2) Remove the E-rings q and w; then, remove
the pick-up roller etogether with the collar.
3) Holding the copier’s grips, remove the copier
from the cassette unit.
Caution:
2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller Unit
1) Remove the cassette.
Take care not to lose the pin from the rear.
2) Remove the stop ring (plastic) q found at the
front of the pick-up roller unit.
1
3
1
2
Figure 4-337
Figure 4-335
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
4) Remove the four screws r, and disconnect the
two connectors t; then, remove the pick-up
drive unit y.
4. Points to Note When Installing the
Pick-Up Roller
When installing the pick-up roller q, install it so
that the marking wshown in Figure 4-338 is toward
the rear.
4
5
6
4
5
4
2
1
Figure 4-341
Figure 4-338
6. Removing the Cassette Motor
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the two screws q, and disconnect the
connector(J114)w;then, removethemotore.
5. Removing the Pick-Up Unit
1) Remove the rear cover and the right cover.
2) Remove the screw q.
1
3
2
1
1
Figure 4-339
Figure 4-342
3) Remove the screw w, and remove the harness
guide e.
2
3
Figure 4-340
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
7. Removing the Pick-Up Clutch
1) Remove the pick-up drive unit. (See “Removing
the Pick-Up Drive Unit.”)
9. Removing the Pick-Up Motor (Cas-
sette Pedestal-K1)
1) Remove the upper rear cover.
2) Remove the cassette motor. (See “Removing
the Cassette Motor.”)
2) Remove the two screws q, and disconnect the
connector w; then, remove the motor e.
3) Remove the three screws q and bushing w;
then, remove the side plate eand the pick-up
clutch r.
1
3
1
2
2
4
3
1
Figure 4-343
Figure 4-345
8. Removing the Cassette Driver PCB
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Disconnect all connectors from the cassette
driver PCB q.
10.Removing the Pick-Up Clutch (Cas-
sette Pedestal-K1; cassettes 3, 4)
1) Remove the upper rear cover.
2) Remove the pick-up motor.
3) Remove the three screws w, and remove the
driver PCB q.
3) Disconnect the two relay connectors q.
1
2
1
Figure 4-344
Figure 4-346
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
4) Remove the six screws wand two E-rings e;
then, remove the support plate r.
H. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1
1. Removing the Pedestal Motor Drive
Assembly
5) Remove the two pick-up clutches t.
1) Slide out the holding tray to the front.
2
2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Disconnect the four connectors q, and remove
the harness from harness guide w.
3
4) Remove the three mounting screws e, and
remove the pedestal motor drive assembly. r.
4
3
5
3
4
2
Figure 4-347
11.Removing the Driver PCB (Cassette
Module-A2/Cassette Pedestal-K1)
1) Remove the rear cover/upper rear cover.
2) Disconnect all connectors from the cassette
driver PCB q.
2
1
3
Figure 4-349
2) Remove the four screws w, and remove the
driver PCB q.
2. Removing the Paper Deck
1) Remove the front right cover and the front left
cover.
2
2
1
2) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove
the stopper plate wfrom both left and right.
1
Figure 4-348
2
Figure 4-350 (right)
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
4) Mark the position of the latch assembly, and
detach the latch assembly by removing the
mounting screws eon both left and right (6 in
total).
2
3
1
3
Figure 4-351 (left)
3) Slide out the paper deck slowly to the front.
Figure 4-353a (left)
3. Removing the Lifter Wire
1) Remove the paper deck.
3
2) Remove the deck front cover.
3) Removethetwoscrewsqfromtheinsideofthe
deck and remove the guide plate wfrom both
front and rear.
2
3
Figure 4-353b (right)
5) Remove the mounting screw r from the front
right, and remove the gear cover t.
1
Figure 4-352
5
4
Figure 4-354
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
6) Remove the mounting screw yfrom the front,
and remove the oil damper plate u.
8) Remove the E-ring !; then, remove the gear
!, parallel pin, and pulley cover (front/rear in
common).
11
12
6
7
Figure 4-355
Figure 4-357
7) Remove the E-ring ifrom the lifter drive shaft
(rear); then, remove the gear o, two washers,
and spring !.
9) Remove the end of the wire from the pulley
(front/rear in common).
10) Remove the fastener ! from the wire relay
assembly; then, remove the pulley cover, and
remove the wire from the pulley (front/rear in
common).
10
9
13
8
Figure 4-356
Figure 4-358
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
11) Remove the mounting screw !, and remove
6) Remove the six mounting screws t, and re-
the wire together with the mounting support.
move the pick-up assembly.
5
14
Figure 4-359
Figure 4-361
4. Removing the Pick-Up Assembly
1) Open the right door of the pedestal, and slide
out the paper deck to the front about 10 cm.
5. Removing the Pick-Up Roller
1) Remove the pick-up assembly.
2) Remove the stop ring q, and remove the pick-
up roller w together with the roller collar.
Caution:
• Forthepaperdeckpedestal,slideoutonlythe
paper deck.
• Do not try to detach the pick-up assembly
without removing the paper deck from the
pedestal; the lifter will make the removal of
the pick-up assembly impossible.
• Do not slide out the paper deck too far toward
the front; doing so would cause the pedestal
to tilt to the front when the pick-up assembly
is removed.
2
1
2) Remove the right cover.
3) Remove the screw q; then, remove the stop
plate.
4) Remove the eight mounting screws w, and
remove the two support plates e.
5) Disconnect the four connectors r.
Figure 4-362
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
Figure 4-360
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
4) Remove the stop ring tfrom the feeding roller.
6. Points to Note
a. Thecollarsforthepick-uprollerareidentifiedby
color; use the gold collar for the front, and the
silver collar for the rear.
b. Do not separate the rubber portion of the pick-
up roller from the collar.
7. Removing the Feeding Roller
1) Remove the pick-up roller from the front.
2) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove
the pick-up roller arm bushing w.
1
5
Figure 4-365
5) Remove the pick-up roller from the rear, and
removethepick-uprollershaftfromthebushing
at the rear.
6) Remove the drive belt yfrom the feeding roller
u, and remove the feeding roller and the roller
shaft i.
2
7
Figure 4-363
8
3) Removethepick-uprollerarmeandtheweight
rfrom the pick-up roller shaft.
6
Figure 4-366
3
4
Figure 4-364
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
2) Remove the stop ring e, and remove the
separation roller r.
8. Points to Note
When installing the feeding roller q, make sure
that the belt pulley wattached to the feeding roller
is toward the rear of the copier.
4
3
2
1
Front of copier
Figure 4-369
Figure 4-367
10.Points to Note
When installing the separation roller q, make
sure that the D-cut in the roller collar is toward the
front of the copier.
9. Removing the Separation Roller
1) Opentherightdoor, andremovethetwomount-
ing screws wfrom the separation roller assem-
bly support plate q; then, remove the separa-
tion roller together with the pressure arm.
Rear
1
Front of copier
2
1
Figure 4-368
Figure 4-370
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
11.Adjusting the Pressure of the Sepa-
ration Roller
If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs fre-
quently during pick-up operation, adjust the posi-
tion of the pressure spring for the separation roller.
q if double feeding is frequent, move the hook of
the spring toward A.
w if pick-up failure is frequent, move the hook of
the spring toward B.
1
2
3
B
A
4
Figure 4-371
12.Position of the Pick-Up Roller Re-
leasing Solenoid
Install the solenoid so that the pick-up roller arm
qbutts against the upper stay wwhen the plunger
of the solenoid is pushed in.
Butted.
2
1
Butted.
Figure 4-372
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
2. Removing the Blank Exposure As-
sembly
IV. EXPOSURE SYSTEM
1) Open the front cover.
2) Pull the open/close lever to open the body.
3) Remove the inside cover.
4) Remove the exhaust fan and the cartridge.
(See “Removing the Exhaust Fan.”)
5) Disconnect the connector (J315) qon the DC
controller PCB; then, remove the two screws
w.
A. Illuminating Assembly
1. Removing the Scanning Lamp/Fluo-
rescent Heater
1) Disconnect the power plug.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
3) Remove the upper rear cover.
4) Move the scanner unit to the center.
5) Remove the two screws q, and remove the
light-blocking plate w.
1
2
2
1
Figure 4-403
Figure 4-401
6) Pushuptheblankexposureassemblyelightly,
and pull it off toward the bottom front.
6) Remove the screw t, and disconnect the con-
nector y.
3
7) Pull the halogen lamp uslowly toward the front
to remove.
7
Figure 4-404
6
5
Figure 4-402
Caution:
Do not touch the halogen lamp. (If necessary,
wrap lint-free paper around it.)
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
3. Removing the Blank Exposure Lamp
1) Remove the blank exposure lamp. (See “Re-
moving the Blank Exposure Assembly.”)
2) Remove the four screws q, and disconnect the
connector w.
4. Removing the Blank Shutter Sole-
noid
1) Remove the blank exposure assembly.
2) Remove the blank top plate, and disconnect the
connector q. (See “Removing the Blank Expo-
sure Assembly.”)
1
1
3) Remove the E-ring w, and remove the link arm
efrom the blank shutter.
4) Remove the two screws r, and pull out the
blank shutter solenoid.
3
2
Figure 4-405
3) Disconnect the connector e.
3
1
2
4
Figure 4-408
5. Positioning the Blank Shutter Sole-
noid
Adjustthepositionofthesolenoidsothatbottom
A is 9.5 ±0.5 mm on both sides when the solenoid
is moved in the direction of ON. Do not force the
shutter excessively.
After the adjustment, check to make sure that
the solenoid moves smoothly.
Figure 4-406
4) Remove the three screws r, and remove the
blank exposure lamp t.
4
Figure 4-409a
5
Figure 4-407
Figure 4-409b
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
8. Installing the Mirror Heater
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Install the cord clamp qto the bottom plate of
the lens mount.
6. Routing the Blank Shutter Cable
Attach the spring the outside
of the slide shutter.
Slide shutter (rear)
3) Install the mirror heater ewith a screw w.
2
3
Wind 3.5 items
Slide shutter (front)
Figure 4-410
1
7. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin Po-
sition
Turn the blank adjusting screw on the front plate
shown in Figure 4-411 so that the measurements
meet the standards.
Figure 4-412
4) Connect the connector r.
5) Set the lens heater harness t to the cord
clamp.
q CW turn:
moves the margin to the front
w CCW turn: moves the margin to the rear
e full turn:
moves about 1 mm
4
5
1
Figure 4-411
Figure 4-413
6) Install the copyboard glass.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5) Set the mirror heater harness t to the cord
9. Installing the Lens Heater
1) Remove the copyboard glass and the lens
hood.
guide.
2) Remove the three screws, and disconnect the
two connectors; then, remove the original size
sensor q together with its mount.
5
Figure 4-416
6) Installtheoriginalsizesensormount,lenshood,
and copyboard glass.
1
Figure 4-414
3) Install the lens heater w with a screw e.
4) Connect the connector r.
4
3
2
Figure 4-415
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
Caution:
V. CHARGING SYSTEM
Take extra care not to damage the photosensi-
tive drum.
A. Drum Unit
1. Removing the Drum Unit
1) Open the front door.
2) Pull the developing assembly releasing lever q
to the front, and turn it clockwise.
Caution:
The photosensitive drum is highly susceptible
to light, and exposure even to room lighting
could lead to white spots or black bands on
copies.
1
As a rule, you must not turn on the copier with
the drum unit removed; otherwise, the following
can occur:
• The registration roller and the transfer guide
will interfere; rotation of the registration roller
during WMUPR can damage the registration
roller.
2. Cleaning
If the surface of the photosensitive drum be-
comes soiled, wipe it with a cloth coated with toner.
(Do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.)
Caution:
Figure 4-501
You should never dry-wipe the surface of the
photosensitive drum or use solvent on it.
Do not use drum cleaning powder.
3) Open the top body.
4) Turn the knob w counterclockwise, and re-
move it.
5) Pull out the drum unit eslowly to the front.
3
2
Figure 4-502
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
B. Primary Charging Assem-
bly
2. Cleaning the Cleaning Pad and the
Primary Charging Roller
1) Remove the primary charging assembly unit.
2) As in Figure 4-505, place the primary charging
assembly, and clean the cleaning pad ewith a
cotton swab ror folded lint-free paper.
1. Removing the Primary Charging Unit
1) Remove the drum unit from the body.
2) Slide the locks qfound on the top of the drum
unit in the direction of the arrows.
Caution:
• Dry-wipe only. Do not use water, alcohol,
solvent, or any alcohol- or solvent-related
agents.
• When dry-wiping, use strokes in one direction
only.
1
1
Figure 4-503
4
5
3) While rotating the primary charging unit w in
the direction of the arrow, remove it together
with its holder.
Figure 4-505
3) Then, clean the primary charging roller twith
lint-free paper ywhile rotating the roller.
2
Caution:
• Dry-wipe only. Do not use water, alcohol,
solvent, or any alcohol- or solvent-related
agents.
• When dry-wiping, move in one direction only.
Figure 4-504
5
6
Figure 4-506
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
3. Positioning the Primary Charging
Roller Cleaning Solenoid
Loosen the two screws used to fix the solenoid
e in place and move the solenoid e in the the
direction of arrow B so that the distance l in Figure
4-507 is 5.5 ±0.2 mm when the joint q is butted
against a of the solenoid support plate w.
C. Transfer Charging Assem-
bly
1. Removing the Transfer Roller
1) Open the front door.
2) Open the top body.
3) Remove the static eliminator.
4) Remove the bushing q, and remove the trans-
fer roller wby lifting it.
1
2
B
2
3
a
= 5.5 ± 0.2
Figure 4-507
1
Caution:
You must always make this adjustment when-
ever you have replaced the solenoid.
Figure 4-508
Caution:
Do not touch the surface of the roller.
Do not soil the surface of the roller.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
4) Install the heater holder tto the transfer guide
ywith two screws r.
D. Drum Heater*
* This may not be available for sale in some areas.
1. Installing the Drum Heater
6
1) Remove the transfer guide from the copier.
2) Install the cord clamp wto the heater holder q.
1
4
5
4
FIgure 4-511
5) Install the transfer guide to the copier.
6) Connect the connector u of the heater to the
copier’s connector.
2
Figure 4-509
3) Put the heater unit einto the heater holder.
3
7
Figure 4-512
Figure 4-510
Caution:
As necessary, keep the heater harness in place
on the cord guide using tie-wraps.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
1) Remove the developing assembly from the
copier.
2) Remove the four screws q, and remove the
developing cover w.
VI. DEVELOPING SYS-
TEM
1. Removing the Developing Assembly
1) Open the copier’s front door.
2) Operate the open/close lever to open the top
body.
1
2
3) Turnthelockingleverq clockwisetounlockthe
developing assembly.
4) Remove the screw w.
5) Pull the developing assembly e slowly to the
front.
2
1
3
1
Figure 4-602
3) Place a newspaper or the like on the floor or a
desk top, and pour out the toner from the
developing assembly.
4) Remove the two screws e, and remove the
blade assembly* r.
* consisting of the blade and its mount.
4
Figure 4-601
2. Removing the Blade Assembly
Caution:
In European model, there are two type of blade
unit. The old type developing blade does not
have spacers at front and rear side.
3
Figure 4-603
[Old type]
Spacers
*
Spacers are glued on the new type
developing blade unit.
[New type]
If the developing blade unit for the developing a
ssembly aith the old type is removed, the old
type can't be reattached.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5) Remove the three E-rings u, and gear i, gear
o, and gear !.
3. Removing the Developing Cylinder
Side Seal
1) Remove the developing assembly from the
7
copier.
2) Remove the blade assembly.
Caution:
In European model, there are two type of blade
unit. If old type blade are attached, it can't be
removed.
7
Caution:
The blade must be installed at high precision.
Do not remove it in the field. If necessary,
remove it intact on its mounting plate.
8
9
10
Figure 4-606
3) Remove the screw q, and remove the front
cover w.
6) Remove the screw !, and remove the butting
roll !and roll case !.
11
2
12
1
13
Figure 4-604
Figure 4-607
4) Remove the three screws e, and remove the
terminal r, roll case t, and roll y.
7) Remove the developing cylinder !.
5
4
14
3
Figure 4-608
3
6
Figure 4-605
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
8) Remove the side seal !. (both sides)
4. InstallingtheSideSealandtheBlade
Assembly
1) Clean the area where the side seal will be
installed with alcohol.
2) Attach the side seal as indicated in Figure 4-
611.
15
Figure 4-609
Figure 4-611
3) Check that the side seal and the container are
in firm contact.
4) In European model, push the developing blade
unit attachment section all the way against the
upper side and secure it with the screw.
15
Figure 4-610
Some spacers are glued top and
*
bottom in reverse; however, regardless
of the spacer positions, attach the
unit by pushing it all the way against
the Upper side.
Figure 4-612
In other model, engage both ends of the blade
assembly q with the developing aseembly, and
tighten the two screws w.
1
2
Figure 4-613
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
2. Removing the Upper Fixing Unit
1) Open the front cover.
VII. FIXING SYSTEM
2) Open the top body.
3) Remove the two screws q, and remove the
fixing assembly cover w.
1. Construction
Oil application roller
1
Upper roller
2
Figure 4-702
Lower roller
4) Disconnect the three connectors e, and re-
move the screw r.
Figure 4-701
4
3
Figure 4-703
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5) Open the fixing shutter t with the screw driver
inserted into the hole u, after lifting the fixing
shutter.
6) Remove the four screws w, and remove the
fixing cover (both front and rear).
6
7
2
5
Figure 4-706(front)
Figure 4-704
6) Pull out the upper fixing unit slowly toward the
rear.
Caution:
Do not touch the fixing roller.
3. Removing the Fixing Roller
Caution:
Wait until the heater and the heater connector
have cooled adequately before starting the
following work:
2
1) Remove the upper fixing unit. (See “Removing
the Upper Fixing Unit.”)
Figure 4-706(rear)
2) Remove the front and rear cover.
3) Remove the front wire (stopper).
4) Pull toward rear the fixing roller.
5) Remove the two screws q, and pull out the
cleaning roller to the front.
7) Open the two wire saddles e, and remove the
two fastons r; then, remove the heater.
1
4
3
Figure 4-707
Figure 4-705
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
8) Pushthethermalswitch tinthedirectionofthe
11) Remove the E-ring !at the front, and remove
thebush!andthebearing!;then, pulloutthe
upper roller.
arrow, and remove it.
10
11
12
5
Figure 4-708
Figure 4-711
9) Remove the screw y, and remove the metal
plate u.
12) Remove the three E-rings ! at the rear, and
pull out the gear !and the bush !.
15 14
6
7
1313 13
Figure 4-709
Figure 4-712
10) Remove the screw i, and remove the ther-
mistor o.
4. Points to Note after Replacing the
Upper Fixing Unit
9
8
• If you have replaced the upper fixing unit, you
must enter the temperature adjustment in
service mode No. 304. (See the Service
Handbook.)
Caution:
Do not touch the surface of the heater.
Figure 4-710
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5. Removing the Lower Fixing Unit
1) Remove the E-ring q, and remove the lower
fixing unit w.
2
1
3
Figure 4-715
4) Remove the lower fixing roller rtogether with
the bushing.
Figure 4-713
Caution:
Do not touch the surface of the fixing cleaning
roller or the lower fixing roller.
6. Removing the Separation Claw/Fix-
ing Cleaning Roller
1) Remove the front cover.
2) Remove the screw q, and remove the separa-
tion claw unit w.
3
4
Figure 4-716
5) Remove the bushing y from the front, and
remove the HOT warning cover u.
·········
·········
3
·········
·········
·········
·········
·········
·········
2
1
Figure 4-714
6
7
3) Remove the separation claw efrom the sepa-
ration claw unit.
Figure 4-717
Caution:
6) Remove the fixing cleaning roller by lifting it.
Take care so that the spring will not fly away.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
Reference:
7. Adjusting the Lower Fixing Roller
Pressure (nip)
If fixing faults are noted, make adjustments as
follows:
The paper will be stopped halfway sandwiched
between the fixing rollers; it will be discharged
about 10 sec later.
The nip is correct if it is as indicated in Figure 4-
718; otherwise, turn the bolt to adjust.
8) Measure the nip.
c
A4 size
Feeding
direction
b Center of paper
b : 4.5 ± 0.5mm
| a-c | : 0.5mm or less
Figure 4-718
Note:
a and c represent points 10 mm from both ends
of paper.
a. Measuring the Nip
Measurethenipbeforestartingtousethecopier
for the day.
1) Open the copyboard cover, and make an A4
solid black copy.
2) Place the copy with its solid black facing down
in the cassette.
3) Press the service mode switch (SW850) with a
hex key.
• The machine starts service mode and indi-
cates ‘1’.
4) Press ‘4’ on the numeric key pad.
• The machine indicates ‘4’.
5) Press the AE key.
• Themachinestartsoperation/inspectionmode
and indicates ‘401’.
6) Press ‘6’ on the numeric keypad.
• The machine indicates ‘406’.
7) Press the Start key.
• Themachinepicksuppaperfromthecassette,
allows measurement as in Figure 4-718, and
discharges paper.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
B. Composite Power Supply
PCB
VIII. ELECTRICAL
A. DC Controller PCB
1. RemovingtheCompositePowerSup-
ply PCB
1) Remove the lower rear cover and the left cover.
2) Disconnect all connectors of the composite
power supply PCB.
1. Removing the DC Controller PCB
1) Remove the lower rear cover.
2) Disconnect the connector from the DC controller.
3) Remove the six screws, and remove the DC
controller PCB from the mounting plate.
3) Disconnect J317 and J322 qof the DC control-
ler PCB.
2. Points to Note When Replacing the
DC Controller
1
• When sending the DC controller PCB to the
workshop or the factory, put it in a static conduc-
tive bag. Use a static conductive bag whose that
is transparent enough in order for the face of the
DC controller PCB to be visible.
After replacement, perform the following:
q enter the settings recorded on the service
mode label
w adjust the multifeeder paper width sensor
e adjust the scanning lamp light intensity
r adjust AE
t enter the values recorded on the composite
power supply label
Figure 4-801
4) Disconnect the two AC connectors w, and
remove the two screws e.
3
2
Figure 4-802
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
5) Remove the grounding wire r, screw t, the
remaining connectors,and cord guide hook y;
then, remove the composite power supply PCB
u.
5
4
7
6
Figure 4-803
C. AE Sensor PCB
1. Points to Note When Replacing the
AE Sensor
• After replacement, perform the following:
q adjust AE
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4–52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5
INSTALLATION
The machine is precisely adjusted and strictly inspected before shipment, and it is important to
install the machine so that it retains its pre-shipment performance.
The service person is expected to install the machine based on a full understanding of its
mechanisms and run necessary checks after installation.
I. SELECTING THE SITE ............................. 5-1
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE
COPIER ..................................................... 5-2
A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings....... 5-2
B. Turning On the Copier ......................... 5-5
C. Checking the Images and
Operations ........................................... 5-7
D. Attaching the Drum Unit ...................... 5-8
E. Changing the Cassette Size................ 5-9
III. RELOCATING THE COPIER .................. 5-11
IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT .............. 5-12
V. INSTALLING THE CONTROL
VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE.......................................... 5-16
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-16
B. Installation (to copying machine)....... 5-17
C. Installation (to a cassette Feeding Module-
A2/B2/Cassette Feeding Unit-K1)....... 5-20
VII. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 7 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE.......................................... 5-24
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-24
B. Installation ......................................... 5-25
C. Attaching the Ratings Label .............. 5-27
VIII.INSTALLING THE REMOTE
CARD IV N............................................... 5-14
DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II ......................... 5-28
A. Unpacking.......................................... 5-28
B. Installing to the Copier....................... 5-28
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
I. SELECTING THE SITE
Keep the following in mind when selecting the
site of installation; if possible, pay a visit to the
user’s before the delivery of the machine.
• The site must provide a power outlet that may be
used exclusively for the machine and that meets
the rating ±10%.
• The site must be 45.5° to 90.5°F (7.5° to 30°C) in
temperature and 10% to 80% in humidity. In
particular, avoid areas near water faucets, boil-
ers, humidifiers, or refrigerators.
• Avoid areas near sources of fire, areas subject to
dust or ammonium gas, or areas exposed to the
direct rays of the sun; if necessary, provide cur-
tains to shut out the sun.
• The site must be well ventilated.
• Make sure that the floor will remain in contact with
the copier’s feet and will keep the copier level.
• Make sure that there will be work space that
meets the measurements shown in Figure 5-101;
in other words, there must be distances A and B
around the copier when measured with its front
door open.
B
A
A
A
A: 19.7in./50cm
B: 3.9in./10cm
Figure 5-101
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE COPIER
When a metal part is brought in from a cold to warm environment, droplets of water can develop on the
surface of the part. This phenomenon is called condensation, and condensation in a copier can lead to faulty
images. If the copier has been moved from a cold to warm place, leave it alone for about one hour or more
before unpacking it.
A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings
Step
1
Work
Unpack the copier.
Remarks
2
Detach the plastic cover, and place
the copier on the pedestal holding
its grips; be sure to work in a group
of two.
Install the Cassette Feeding
Module-B2, -A2, etc. (accessory)
according to its Installation Proce-
dure if the copier is to be placed
on it.
Note:
If the A or INCH/AB configuration machine the
copyboard cover is attached.
3
4
Open the cardboard box, and take Check that none of the following accessories is missing:
out all the accessories.
• Copy tray
• Toner
• Cassette (Universal) × 2
• Operator’s Manual
• Drum unit
Remove all tape from the outside
of the copier. Take out the cas-
sette from the cardboard box, and
remove the cushions from inside
the cassette; then, slide the
Make sure that the paper size plate and size label (1 pc.
each) are inside the cassette.
cassette into the copier.
5
Remove the tape from the scanner
fixing found on the outside of the
left cover, remove the screw, and
slide the fixing to the right to
detach it to the front.
Scanner fixing
Screw
• Keep the fixing stored for
possible relocation of the
machine.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
Step
6
Work
Remarks
Open the front cover, and push the
lever found on the left side up in
the direction of the arrow to open
the copier’s top body.
Spacer
Spacer
Spacer
7
Pull up the spacer (front and rear,
1 pc. each) of the fixing roller until
a click is heard.
8
Remove the two pieces of card-
board (spacer) from the feeding
assembly.
Spacer
Spacer
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
Step
Work
Remarks
9
Pull the developing locking lever
toward the front, and turn it clock-
wise to release it.
Developping
assembly
stopper
Knob
Dumy
drum
Stopper
Screw
10
Remove the knob, and remove the
dummy drum from the copier.
(Keep the knob for later.)
Developping
locking lever
11
12
13
Remove the screw, and remove
the developing assembly stopper.
Remove the stopper from the
developing assembly.
Remove the developing assembly,
and check that the developing
cylinder is free of scratches or dirt.
14
Install the developing assembly,
and attach the developing assem-
bly stopper with a screw.
15
16
Engage the developing assembly.
Close the copier’s top unit.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
B. Turning On the Copier
Step
1
Work
Remarks
Connect the power plug to the
power outlet.
Caution:
• Make sure that the power outlet is the rating ±10%.
2
Turn on the power switch.
Make sure that the Add Paper message flashes.
• Press the keypad and the Clear key to make sure that
the copy count indication is correct.
3
4
Turn off the power switch.
Supply toner according to the
instructions given on the toner
supply label attached behind the
front door.
Caution:
When turning the toner cartridge counterclockwise to
set it, you must fully turn it until it is locked; the develop-
ing assembly can cause a fault if you operate the
machine without locking the cartridge.
5
Release the developing assembly
by the developing assembly
locking lever.
6
7
Install the drum unit.
See “D. Attaching the Drum Unit.”
Lock the developing assembly,
and close the copier’s top unit.
8
9
Insert the door switch activator into
the door switch, and turn on the
power.
Service mode switch
In others model except European
model, this procedure is not
necessary.
Go to step 10).
Select service mode No. 313/314,
and enter the settings recorded on
the drum label.
To select service mode,
• Press the service mode switch
(SW850) with a hex key.
Select ‘3’ of the mode by press-
ing ‘3’ on the keypad and AE
key; then, select ‘No. 3 xx’ by
pressing ‘x’ and ‘x’ on the keypad
and the start key.
To enter settings,
• Select ‘No. 313’ in service mode, and enter the setting
recorded on the label (PRIMARY) using the keypad. (To
enter ‘–’, press the % key before entering the setting.)
Then, press the Start key to store the setting.
To enter the setting for IP_OFST, select ‘No. 314’ in
service mode and work in the same way.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
Step
Work
Remarks
10
Execute ‘No. 401’ in service mode. The copier supplies toner from the toner container to the
• Press the service mode switch
(SW850), ‘4’ on the keypad, AE
Key, and Start key in sequence.
developing assembly (about 5 min).
Caution:
• Do not turn off the power or remove the door switch
actuator while the machine is operating.
11
12
Make sure that step 10 has been
completed; then, turn off the
power, and open the copier’s top
unit.
Remove the static eliminator, and
clean it with the static eliminator
brush; then, set the static elimina-
tor.
13
14
Turn on the power.
Only the European model, in case
of the other model, go to step 15.
Execute ‘No. 412’ in service mode.
• Press the service mode switch
(SW850), ‘4’ on the keypad, AE
key, ‘1’ and ‘2’ on the keypad,
and Start key in sequence.
The copier automatically sets the APVC value.
15
16
Set the settings for user mode and
settings mode in service mode to
suit the needs of the user.
Tailor the cassette to suit the
desired size by operating the size
guide plate and size detecting
lever; then, attach the size label.
See “E. Changing the Cassette Size.”
17
Put copy paper in the cassette,
and set the cassette in the copier.
• Make sure that the Add Paper message turns off.
• Make sure that the paper indicator matches with the
size of the cassette.
• Press the keys on the control panel other than the Copy
Start key to make sure that all respective operations are
normal.
18
19
Attach the copy tray.
Remove the door switch activator,
and close the front door.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
C. Checking the Images and Operations
Step
1
Work
Checks/Remarks
Place the Test Sheet on the
• Make sure there is no abnormal sound.
copyboard, and check the copies.
• Check the copy images for each standard reproduction
ratio.
• Make sure that as many copies as specified are made
normally.
• If the copy image is faulty, perform the “Image Adjust-
ment Basic Procedure.”(See service Handbook P.1-5.)
2
3
Make copies in manual mode.
Make sure that the copying operation is normal.
Make sure that the external covers
are free of scratches and deforma-
tions.
4
5
Clean the area around the copier.
Move the machine to its site of
installation.
Make sure that the copier is more or less level.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
D. Attaching the Drum Unit
Step
1
Work
Checks/Remarks
Unpack the drum unit, and remove
the light-blocking sheet.
2
Remove the primary charging
roller releasing spacer.
Releasing spacer
Releasing spacer
Take care not to damage the surface of the drum and not
to touch the primary charging roller.
3
Set the drum unit to the copier,
and fix it in position using the knob
used to keep the dummy drum.
Knob
Drum unit
Be sure to insert the drum unit straight along the copier’s
rail.
4
Fill out the label, and attach it to
the drum unit cover.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
4) Move the paper size lever found toward the
front of the cassette so that it is aligned with the
size of the paper to be used.
E. Changing the Cassette Size
Change the cassette size to suit the user’s
needs.
1) Slide the cassette out of the copier.
2) Move the length plate inside the cassette to suit
the length of the paper size.
U
STMTRLTRR STM LGL LTR 11x17
A5R B5R A4R
A
B
B
A
A
A5
STMT
STMTR
A4/A5R
R
T
L
B5R
R
R
LT
A4R
Figure 5-203
Caution:
Failure to adjust the paper size lever will lead to
jams or soiling.
Figure 5-201
3) Move the width plate inside the cassette to suit
the width of the paper to be used.
5) Take out the paper size plates for the cassette,
and pick out the four plates representing the
most frequently used sizes; attach the labels.
A 4 A 3
R
STMTR
A5R
B5R
A5/A4R
LGL/STMT
TRR
L
B5/B4
1x17
TR/1
L
A4/A3
R
A4
A5
Figure 5-202
Figure 5-204
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
6) Set the paper size plates selected in step 4).
After setting the size plate, make sure it corresponds
to the paper size you have selected.
Figure 5-205
Caution:
If you are setting the plate for the position
representing the universal (U) cassette, you
must perform the work described for “universal
cassette paper size setting (505); see p. 3-131.
■ Points to Note When Handling the Photo-
sensitive Drum after Installation
The copier’s photosensitive drum is highly sus-
ceptible to light; mere exposure to room light can
affect the drum enough to produce white spots or
black lines on the copies. Keep the following in
mind:
• Donotspendmorethan5minwhenremoving
jams.
• After detaching the drum unit from the copier
during servicing work, be sure to protect it in
the light-blocking sheet that came with the
drum or fresh copy paper, and place the drum
in a dark place.
Do not touch the photosensitive drum or primary
charging roller.
If you have soiled the surface of the drum
inadvertently, wipe it using a flannel cloth coated
with toner; do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.
Donotdrywipeorusesolventtocleanthedrum.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
III. RELOCATING THE COPIER
If you must relocate the copier by truck or using other means of transportation, perform the following work:
Checks
Step
1
Work
Remarks
Move the lens to the Direct position.
Direct position refers to
the position of the lens
after warm-up initiated by
power-on.
Put the drum unit in a
box for transport.
2
3
4
5
Take out the drum unit.
Fix the scanner in place.
Use the fixing removed at
time of installation.
Tape the front door and delivery
assembly in place.
Place 11 × 17/A3 copy paper on the
copyboard glass, and tape the
copyboard cover in place.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT
Go through the following when replacing the drum unit:
Step
1
Work
Remarks
Turn off the copier, and open the
front door and the copier’s top unit.
2
Release the developing assembly,
and remove the knob to remove
the drum unit.
Locking
lever
Knob
Drum unit
3
4
Unpack the new drum unit, and
remove the light-blocking sheet.
Remove the primary charging
roller releasing spacer.
Releasing spacer
Releasing spacer
Take care not to damage the surface of the drum and not
to touch the primary charging roller.
5
6
Set the drum unit to the copier,
and attach the knob used to fix the
old drum unit.
Fill out the label, and attach it to
the drum unit cover.
7
Lock the developing assembly.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
Step
8
Work
Remarks
Turn on the door switch using the
door switch actuator; then, shift the
power switch to ‘ON’.
Service mode switch
9
Only the European model, in case
of the other model, go to next step.
Select service mode No. 313/314,
and enter the settings recorded on
the drum label.
To select service mode,
• Press the service mode switch
(SW850) with a hex key.
Select ‘3’ of the mode by press-
ing ‘3’ on the keypad and AE
key; then, select ‘No. 3 xx’ by
pressing ‘x’ and ‘x’ on the keypad
and the Start key.
To enter settings,
• Select ‘No. 313’ in service mode, and enter the setting
recorded on the label (PRIMARY) using the keypad. (To
enter ‘–’, press the % key before entering the setting.)
Then, press the Start key to store the setting.
To enter the setting for IP_OFST, select ‘No. 314’ in
service mode and work in the same way.
10
11
12
13
Turn off the power, and open the
copier’s top unit.
Replace the static eliminator, and
close the copier's top unit.
Close the front door, and turn on
the power.
Only the European model, in case
The copier automatically sets the APVC value; it stops in
of the other model, go to next step. about 23 sec.
Execute ‘No. 412’ in service mode.
• Press the service mode swicth
(SW850), ‘4’ on the keypad, AE
key, ‘1’ and ‘2’ on the keypad,
and Start key in sequence.
14
15
Remove the door switch actuator,
and close the front door.
Place the test sheet and check
copy.
Follow image adjustment procedure.
(See the Service Handbook P.1-5.)
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
9) Fix the Control Card IV N to the copier using a
screw w (M4×12); at the time, be sure that the
copier’s emboss e is fitted in the hole in the
Control Card IV N.
V. INSTALLING THE
CONTROL CARD IV N
Caution:
Be sure to disconnect the copier’s power plug
before starting the installation work.
1) Open the front cover
2) Open the copier’s top body by operating its
open/close lever.
3) Detach the front cover.
3
4) Take out the cartridge.
2
5) Detach the inside cover.
6) Loosen the screw on the upper rear cover.
7) Loosen the two screws on the copyboard glass.
8) Detach the face plate q from the control card
cable inlet.
Figure 5-502
When detaching the face plate q, detach it
in the direction of the arrow using pliers or
screwdriver.
10) Disconnect the copier’s dummy connector r.
1
4
Figure 5-503
Figure 5-501
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
11) Connect the connector t of the Control Card
IV N.
t
Figure 5-504
12) Connect the copier’s power plug, and turn on its
power switch to check the operation of the
Control Card IV N.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE
A. Unpacking
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the parts shown in Fig. 5-601 is missing.
2
3
4
6
7
5
1
Figure 5-601
q Cassette Heater .................... 1
w Mounting plate 1 .................... 1
e Mounting plate 2 .................... 1
r Relay harness ....................... 1
t Cord clamp ............................ 1
y Binding screw (black; M4×6). 2
u TP screw (white; M3×6) ........ 2
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
3) Install the mounting plate 1 to the cassette
B. Installation (to copying
machine)
heater with two screws (black; M4×6).
Mounting plate 1
1) Remove both top and bottom cassettes, and
remove the front cover, front lower cover, and
rear cover.
Rear cover
Screws
Front cover
Front lower cover
Figure 5-602
Cassette heater
Figure 5-604
2) Disconnect the connector for the heater from
the copier’s rear, and remove the connector
support member.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the connector
cover of the cassette heater.
Support
member
Connector cover
Connector
Screw
Figure 5-605
Figure 5-603
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
5) Put the screw back, and tighten it.
6) Insert the bend found at the rear of the heater
into the heater mounting hole in the copier’s
rear plate.
8) Connectthecopier’sconnectortotheconnector
on the cassette heater visible at the rear of the
copier.
Heater mounting hole
Connector on
the heater
Connector on
the copier
Figure 5-608
Cassette heater
Figure 5-606
9) Install the copier’s rear cover, front lower cover,
and front cover.
10) Slide both top and bottom cassettes back in.
11) Open the copier’s top unit.
7) Fix the mounting plate 1 in place to the copier’s
side plate with two screws (white; M3×6).
Screws
Figure 5-607
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
12) Turn on the copier’s cassette heater switch. (Of
the two switches, one at the rear; the heater will
be supplied with power when the copier is
switched off.)
Switch for the
cassette
heater
Figure 5-609
13) Close the top unit of the copier.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
C. Installation (to a Cassette
Feeding Module-A2/B2/
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1)
1) Remove the cassettes and all rear covers from
the cassette feeding unit/pedestal.
2) Remove the copier’s rear cover.
3) Install the mounting plate 2 to the cassette
heater with two screws (black; M4×6).
Mounting plate 2
Figure 5-611
5) Open the cover on the front of the cassette
feeding unit/module, and fix the mounting plate
2 in place to the front side plate with two screws
(white; M3×6).
Screw
Cassette heater
Figure 5-610
4) Insert the bend found at the rear of the heater
into the heater mounting slit in the rear side
plate of the cassette feeding unit/ pedestal
(bottom holder).
Screws
Figure 5-612
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
• Cassette Feeding Module-B2
6) Close the cover.
7) Connect the connector on the relay harness to
the connector of the cassette heater (rear side
plateofthecassettefeedingunit/module). (Con-
nect the side where the harness is bundled with
a tie-wrap.)
Tie-wrap
Cord clamp
Figure 5-615
9) Arrange the relay harness on the rear side plate
as indicated (Cassette Feeding Unit-K1).
Relay harness
Connector
Cord clamp
Figure 5-613
8) Install the cord clamp to the hole in the rear side
plate of the cassette feeding unit/pedestal.
• CassetteFeedingModule-A2/CassetteFeed-
ing Unit-K1
Figure 5-616
Cord clamp
Figure 5-614
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
10) Lead the other connector on the relay harness
through the copier’s bottom plate as shown.
12) Fix the relay harness in place to the rear side
plate with the cord clamp.
• Cassette Feeding Unit-K1
Copier's connector
Molded member
Copier's base plate
Figure 5-617
Figure 5-619
11) Connect the connector on the relay harness
with the copier’s connector.
Caution:
Make sure that the relay harness is outside the
are indicated by dashed lines to prevent it from
interfering with the feet of the cassette.
Relay harness
Figure 5-618
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
• Cassette Feeding Module-A2
13) Install the rear cover of the cassette pedestal
and all covers.
14) Install the copier’s rear cover.
Figure 5-620
Caution:
Make sure that the relay harness is outside the
areaindicatedbydashedlinestopreventitfrom
interfering with the feet of the cassette.
• Cassette Feeding Module-B2
Figure 5-621
Caution:
Make sure that the relay harness is outside the
areaindicatedbydashedlinestopreventitfrom
interfering with the feet of the cassette.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
VII. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 7 INSTALLATION PRO-
CEDURE
A. Unpacking
Open the shipping box, and make sure that none of the parts indicated Fig. 5-701 is missing.
2
1
4
3
6
5
7
8
Figure 5-701
q Cassette Heater .................... 1
w Power cord mount ................. 1
e Stay ....................................... 1
r Relay harness ....................... 1
t Binding screw (white; M4×6) . 1
y TP screw (black; M4×6) ........ 1
u Cord clamp ............................ 1
i Ratings label.......................... 1
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
4) Remove the paper deck.
5) Installthepowercordmount. (Usethemounting
screw removed from the face plate.)
B. Installation
1) Remove the copier’s bottom cassette.
2) Removethetwoscrews,andremovethecopier’s
front right cover; then, disengage the snap, and
remove the front lower cover.
Front right cover
Power cord mount
Mounting screws
Figure 5-704
Front lower
cover
6) Install the stay with one mounting screw (white;
M4×6).
Figure 5-702
3) Remove the left cover (4 screws), front upper
cover(2screws), frontleftcover(3screws), and
rear cover (4 screws); then, remove the two
screws, and remove the face plate.
Screw
Stay
Rear cover
Figure 5-705
Front upper cover
Face plate
Left cover
Front left cover
Figure 5-703
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
7) Connect the relay harness to the heater.
9) Connect the relay harness to the connector on
the power cord mount, and keep it in place with
two cord guides.
Relay harness
Cord guides
Figure 5-706
Figure 5-708
8) Install the heater to the paper deck, and fix it in
place with a screw (black; M4×6).
10) Install the left cover, front left cover, front upper
over, and rear cover.
11) Install the copier’s front lower cover and front
right cover.
12) Slide in the copier’s bottom cassette.
Screw
Relay harness
Heater
Figure 5-707
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
C. Attaching the Ratings
Label
1) Peel the backing sheet from the label, and
attach the label to the rear cover of the pedestal
as indicated.
6 mm
Figure 5-709
2) Connect the heater’s power plug to the power
outlet.
3) Turn on the heater’s power switch.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
B. Installation to the Copier
VIII.INSTALLING THE RE-
MOTE DIAGNOSTIC
DEVICE II
i
This model may not be available for sale in
some areas.
Caution:
A. Unpacking
Keep the following in mind when installing the
RDD to the copier:
1. This Accessory is to be installed by a qualified
personal.
q
2. Make sure the copier has been properly in-
stalled before starting the work.
3. Keep the copier’s power cord disconnected
during the work.
4. Be sure to use the appropriate screws (length,
diameter).
w
e
5. Make sure the computer in the service station
has been properly loaded with the RDD’s set-
tings data.
1) Remove the two screws wto detach the RDD’s
top cover q.
w
q
w
r
t
y
Fig. 5-802
2) Connect the Power Supply Unit’s connector e
to the RDD’s connector ras shown.
u
r
Fig. 5-801
q RDD ....................................................... 1 unit
w Power Supply Unit ................................. 1 unit
e Screw (M4×6) ........................................ 4 pcs.
r Harness band ........................................ 2 pcs.
t Switch setting label ................................ 1 pcs.
y Grounding wire* ..................................... 1 pc.
u Ferrite core ............................................ 1 pc.
*Not used.
e
Fig. 5-803
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
3) Remove the two screws y, and detach the face
cover tfrom the copier’s rear cover.
o
i
t
y
y
Fig. 5-804
4) Open the ferrite core u, wind the RDD’s cable
i three times, and close the ferrite core u;
thereafter, connect the cable oon the copier
side and the RDD’s cable i.
u
Note:
If a conversion connector is found on the cable
!from the copier, remove it.
Fig. 5-806
5) Fix the RDD in place on the copier’s rear cover
with four screws y; use the screws removed
from the copier.
o
Modular Jack on the Right
y
Fig. 5-805
y
Fig. 5-807
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
6) Remove the slack from the cable between the
copier and the RDD; keep the excess cable to
the RDD using the harness band !.
8) If the ROM IC6 ! is mounted on the RDD’s
PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 ! to ON;
otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 to OFF.
Note:
1. If the ROM (IC6; !) is not mounted, you
need not mount it.
2. If you are mounting or replacing the ROM
(IC6; ! for upgrading the RDD, be sure to
shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 !to ON.
!
!
Fig. 5-808
7) Shiftbit4oftheDIPswitch2!toONsothatthe
communication mode between the RDD and
the copier is IPC mode.
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
2
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
IC6
CN4
SW1
!
!
CN3
CN2
Fig. 5-810
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
2
SW3
SW2
9) Set the bits of the DIP switch 3 !on the RDD’s
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
IC6
CN4
PCB as indicated in the table.
SW1
CN3
CN2
!
Fig. 5-809
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
2
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
Fig. 5-811
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
11) Reset the RDD’s RAM.
Set the bits on the DIP switch 2!
Switch
SW3-1
SW3-2
SW3-3
Setting
AII
Description
6
on the RDD’s
PCB as indicated in the table, and press the
push switch 4 ! to make sure that LED5 !
(red) comes on.
OFF
ON
bits on SW2
SW2-1
SW2-2
SW2-3
SW2-4
SW2-5
SW2-6
SW2-7
SW2-8
Setting
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
selects push pulse for
RDD circuit confihuration
SW3-4
OFF
ON
OFF
–
selscts dial pulse for
RDD circuit confihuration
ON
OFF
OFF
sets dial pulse speed to
20 PPS
See step 9).
OFF
SW3-5
SW3-6
sets dial pulse speed to
10 PPS
Table 5-802
reserved
Table 5-801
10) Fit the Power Supply Unit into the power plug,
!
and check that LED 1 !
5
(green) on the RDD’s
PCB comes on.
!
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
BAT1
!
1
1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
2
!
IC6
CN4
LED1 LED2 LED3
SW1
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
CN3
CN2
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
2
IC6
CN4
Fig. 5-813
SW1
CN3
CN2
Fig. 5-812
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
12) After making sure that LED5 !
8
(red) has come
on the
14) Connect the RDD to the telephone line.
If you are connecting the RDD on its own,
connect the modular jack cable to the RDD’s
on, set the bits on the DIP switch 2 !
6
RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, and press
the push switch 4 ! to make sure that LED5 !
(red) goes out, indicating that the RAM has
been reset.
connector @ (LINE).
0
If you will be using the RDD’s extra circuit,
connect the existing telephone or fax machine
to the RDD’s connector @ (TEL), and connect
the telephone circuit to the RDD’s connector @
(LINE).
bits on SW2
SW2-1
SW2-2
SW2-3
SW2-4
SW2-5
SW2-6
SW2-7
SW2-8
Setting
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
2
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
OFF
ON
IC6
CN4
SW1
See step 9).
OFF
CN3
CN2
Table 5-803
@
@
Fig. 5-816
!
15) Call up the service station, and request the
RDD’s initial settings. (LED 4 @ (red) starts to
flash upon receipt.)
!
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
2
!
IC6
CN4
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
SW1
BAT1
1
1
2
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
CN3
CN2
@
IC6
CN4
SW1
Fig. 5-814
13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch 2 !
9
on the RDD’s
CN3
CN2
PCB to OFF.
Fig. 5-817
!
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
2
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
Fig. 5-815
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
16) Call up the service station to check if the initial
settings have been successfully made; if the
attempt has failed, reset the RAM once again
starting with step 11) through 13).
19) Press the copier’ COPY START key to make
sure that LED3 @ (pink) flashes each time a
copy is delivered.
@
Important:
You must confirm that the RDD’s settings are
correct by calling the service station.
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
2
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
17) Check that you can place a telephone call from
the RDD to the computer in the service station.
IC6
CN4
SW1
Press the push switch 4 !. LED6 @ (red)
3
should come on; it will go out when transmis-
sion ends successfully, or will start to flash if
transmission fails.
CN3
CN2
Retransmission is executed in response to a
Fig. 5-820
press on the push switch 4 ! while LED6 @3 is
7
flashing.
20) Attach the Switch setting label @, to the RDD’s
top cover q; then, record the setting of each
Transmission is canceled in response to a
press on the push switch 1 @
flashing.
4
while LED6 @ is
3
switch on the label.
w
@
LED1 LED2 LED3
q
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
SW3
SW2
w
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
@
2
IC6
CN4
!
SW1
@
CN3
CN2
Fig. 5-818
Fig. 5-821
18) Check that the communications between the
RDD and the copier are executed normally.
Connect the copier’s power plug, and switch it
21) Fix the RDD’s top cover q in place using two
screws w. (Make sure that the Power Unit’s
cable is fixed in place on the cable guide inside
the RDD and is not trapped by the top cover q.
ontomakesurethatLED2@(orange)flashes.
5
@
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
6
1
BAT1
1
1
2
SW3
SW2
LED5
LED6
LED4
SW4
IC6
CN4
SW1
CN3
CN2
Fig. 5-819
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5–34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS....... 6-1
A. Periodically Replaced Parts ................ 6-1
II. DURABLES AND CONSUMABLES .......... 6-2
A. Copier .................................................. 6-2
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2,
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1 ..................... 6-3
III. BASIC SERVICING ................................... 6-4
IV. SERVICING CHART ................................. 6-5
A. Scheduled Maintenance Work ............ 6-5
Cassette Feeding Module-A2,
and Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 ............ 6-3
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS
Ofthepartsusedinthemachine, thosegiveninthetablemustbereplacedonaperiodicalbasistomaintain
a specific level of machine performance. (You must replace them regardless of the absence of exterior wear
or damage, as they significantly affect the machine performance should they fail.)
Schedule a visit so that you may replace the parts during periodical servicing.
A. Periodically Replaced Parts
As of FEB. 1998
Remarks
No.
1
Parts name
Static eliminator
Q’ty
1
Life
Parts No.
100,000
FG5-2912-020
Note:
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.
COPYRIGHT
©
1996 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
II. DURABLES AND CONSUMABLES
Of the parts used in the machine, those given in the table may prove to require replacement once or more
over the period of warranty because of wear or damage; replace them as necessary referring to the guide.
A. Copier
As of FEB. 1998
No.
1
Parts name
Pick-up roller
Parts No.
FB3-8771-00P
FG5-6792-020
FB1-8581-000
Q’ty Life (copies)
Remarks
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
60,000
Actual copies made.
Actual copies made.
Actual copies made.
Actual copies made.
2
Pick-up separation pad
Multifeeder pick-up roller
3
4
Multifeeder separation pad FB2-2167-000
5
Halogen Lamp
FB7-3271-000
FB3-4494-00P
FA0-0353-00P
FB2-2223-000
FG5-2928-140
FB2-2316-000
6
Fixing cleaning roller
Oil-applying roller
Transfer roller
7
8
100,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
200,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
9
Fixing upper unit
Lower fixing roller
10
11
12
13
14
Upper fixing separation claw FB1-0301-000
Lower fixing separation claw FB1-7275-000
Pre-exposure lamp
FG5-2891-000
FG5-3275-04P
FB2-3834-000
FB2-3825-00P
FG5-7012-00P
FC2-8902-00P
Developing assembly
14-1 Developing cylinder
14-2 Side seal
Replace in units of
12 or 12-1 through
12-4.
14-3 Developing blade unit
15
Scanner cooling fan filter
Note:
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6–2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2, Cassette Feeding Module-A2,
and Cassette Feeding Unit-K1
As of FEB. 1998
Remarks
No.
1
Parts name
Pick-up roller
Pick-up separation pad
Q’ty
Life (copies)
100,000
Parts No.
Actual copies made.
Actual copies made.
FB2-2251-000 1 through 3
2
1 through 3
100,000
FG5-3614-000
Note:
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.
C. Paper Deck Pedestal-K1
As of FEB. 1998
Remarks
No.
1
Parts name
Pick-up roller
Q’ty
1
Life (copies)
100,000
Parts No.
Rear
Front
FF5-1220-000
FF5-1221-000
FB1-7061-000
FB1-7060-020
100,000
1
2
3
Feeding roller
1
100,000
Separation roller
1
100,000
Note:
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.
COPYRIGHT
©
1996 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
III. BASIC SERVICING
The machine does not have items to be serviced on a scheduled basis. However, it is desirable to go
through the steps in the table when paying a visit to the user.
Items
Step
1
Work
Remarks
Check the general
condition.
Meet the person in charge.
Check the following:
a. image density
b. soiling of white
background
2
Make test copies in DIRECT,
REDUCE, ENLARGE.
c. clarity of characters
d. leading edge non-
image width
standard: 2.5 ±1.5 mm
(DIRECT, one-sided)
standard: 2.5 ±1.5 mm
e. left/right margin
f. fixing/registration
displacement, soiled
back
(DIRECT, one-sided)
g. abnormal noise
h. counter operation
3
4
Clean the static eliminator and feeding
assembly.
Use the special brush
(accessory) when
cleaning the static
eliminator.
Clean the fixing/delivery assembly:
• paper guide plate
Use solvent.
Use solvent.
• separation claw
5
6
Perform servicing according to the
number of copies made.
Clean the copyboard cover and
copyboard glass.
7
8
9
Make test copies.
Make sample copies.
Put sample copies in order and clean
up the site of installation.
10
11
Record the latest counter reading.
Fill out the Servicing Sheet, and report
to the person in charge.
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6–4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
IV. SERVICING CHART
Caution:
Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated.
A. Scheduled Maintenance Work
: clean
: replace ✩: lubricate
: adjust
: check or clean
Remarks
every
every
year
every
20,000
every
Unit
Parts
Copyboard glass
Pick-up roller
60,000
100,000
External
Control
Pick-up
assembly
Use alcohol.
Use alcohol; then,
apply lubricant.
Scanner drive
assembly
Scanning rail
✩
Transfer guide assembly
Feeding belt
Feeding
assembly
Use a moist cloth.
Feeding assembly PCB
Scanning lamp reflecting plate
Scanning lamp side
reflecting plate
Use a blower brush; if
the dirt cannot be
removed, use alcohol.
Optical path
No. 1 through No. 6 mirrors
Lens
Dust-proofing glass
Clearner bottom
Drum support shaft
Charging roller
Actual number of times
the drum ikit has been
used.
Drum kit
Use a cotton wad.
Charging
assembly
Charging roller cleaner
Static eliminator
Developing
assembly
Developing roll
Use cleaning oil.
Use solvent..
Lower fixing roller
Separation claw (lower, upper)
Fixing inlet guide
Delivery guide/ tray
Fixing feeding spacer
Delivery roll
Fixing
assembly
Delivery
assembly
Use alcohol.
Use alcohol.
Set-back roller
Duplexing
unit
Re-pick-up roller
COPYRIGHT
©
1996 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6–6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..................... A-1
L. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ........... A-2
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............... A-5
D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM... A-7
E. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-21
F. CONTROL PANEL KEYPCB ................. A-27
G. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ......... A-31
H. INTENSITY SENSOR CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-32
I. TONER LEVEL DETECTION CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ............................................... A-33
J. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............. A-37
M. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2 DRIVER
CIRSUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-38
N. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 GENERAL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-41
O. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 ............ A-42
P. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 GENERAL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............................... A-45
Q. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1
DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................ A-46
R. SPECIAL TOOLS ................................... A-47
S. SOLVENTS/OILS ................................... A-48
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............. A-34
K. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2
DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................ A-35
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COPYRIGHT © 1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART
A4, 2 copies, DIRECT, cassette 1
Power switch
ON
Copy start key
ON
Sequence
STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
AER
Main motor (M1)
1
2
Pre-exposure lamp
Primary charging (APVC)
Primary charging bias
Scanning motor (M2)
Scanning lamp
3
Reverse
Forward
4
5
6
Image exposure
Blanking shutter solenoid
(SL3)
7
Transfer reference bias
(ATVC)
8
9
Transfer cleaning bias
Transfer bias
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Static eliminator bias
Developing bias AC
Developing bias DC
Fixing heater (H1)
-80 to -560V
High
Low
Heat exhaust fan (FM1)
Environment heater (H3)
Scanner cooling fan (FM2)
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Registration sensor (PS6)
20 Separation sensor (PS7)
21 Delivery sensor (PS8)
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch
(CL2)
22
23
24
Vertical path roller clutch
Registration clutch (CL1)
0;Lqpplying solenoid (SL6)
25
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1. Signals
A/A*
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION / DELIVERY/ DUPLEX MOTOR PHASE A
CSZ3
CASSETTE SIZE signal 3
ACBIAS
AE
AEREF
ATTH
B/B*
BIASS
DEVELOPING AC BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal
AE SENSOR OUTPUT signal AE
AE SENSOR REFERENCE signal AE
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR signal
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION / DELIVERY/ DUPLEX MOTOR PHASE B
DEVELOPING DC BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal
DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command
BLANKING SHUTTER HOME POSITION signal
BLANKING SHUTTER SOLENOID DRIVE command
CASSETTE2 SIZE 1 signal
CASSETTE2 SIZE 2 signal
CASSETTE2 SIZE 3 signal
CASSETTE2 SIZE 4 signal
CASSETTE3 PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE3 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION1 signal
CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION2 signal
CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION3 signal
CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION4 signal
CASSETTE3 VERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE4/5 PAPER DETECTION 1 signal
CASSETTE4/5 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
CASSETTE4/5 SIZE DETECTION 1 signal
CASSETTE4/5 SIZE DETECTION 2 signal
CASSETTE4/5 SIZE DETECTION 3 signal
CASSETTE4/5 SIZE DETECTION 4 signal
CASSETTE4 VERTICAL PAPER DETECTION 1 signal
CASSETTE5 VERTICAL PAPER DETECTION 1 signal
CONTROL CARD DRIVE command
CSZ4
CVOP
DEL
DEOP
DEPRL
DLD
DPD
DUEX
DUIN
CASSETTE SIZE signal 4
CCPYBOARD COVER OPEN signal
DECK LIFTER LIMIT signal
DECK OPEN signal
DECK PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE command
DECK LIFTER POSITION DETECTION signal
DELIVERY DETECTION signal
DUPLEX PAPER EXIT DETECTION signal
DUPLEX PAPER INLET DETECTION saignal
DUPLEXING UNIT PRE-REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
DUPLEX REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
DECK VERTICAL ROLLER PAPER DETECTION signal
EARTH RL DRIVE command RL2
BPWM
BSHP
BSSLD
C2SZ1
C2SZ2
C2SZ3
C2SZ4
C3PD
DUPD
DURG
DVRPD
EHTRL
FDFD
FFA/FFA*
FFB/FFB*
FFCB/FFCA
FFD
FLHTOFF
FLON
FLPRHT
FLS
FLTH
FLTHON
FMD
HEFD
HTON
HTRD
JCTL
JLVCTL
LHP
LID
LNSA/LNSA*
LNSB/LNSB*
LNSCA
LNSCB
LOCK
FEEDING FAN DRIVE signal
C3PUCLD
C3SZ1
C3SZ2
C3SZ3
C3SZ4
C3VPD
C4PD/C5PD
C4PUCLD/C5PUCLD
C4SZ1/C5SZ1
C4SZ2/C5SZ2
C4SZ3/C5SZ3
C4SZ4/C5SZ4
C4VPD
C5VPD
CCD
CCDT
CDC
CHSLD
CL1D
CL2D
CL3D
CL4D
CL5D
CL6D
FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command A/A*
FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command B/B*
FUSER FILM MOTOR VOLTAGE command A/B
FIXING FILM POSITION signal
FLUORESCENT LAMP HEATER OFF command
FLUORESCENT LAMP ON command
FLUORESCENT LAMP PRE-HEAT command
FLUORESCENT LAMP INTENSITY signal
FLUORESCENT LAMP THERMISTOR signal
FLUORESCENT LAMP HEATER ON command
FUSER FILM MOTOR DRIVE command
HEATER EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command
HEATER ON DETECTION signal
HEATER DRIVE command
DISCHARGE BIAS DRIVE command
CONTROL CARD DETECTION signal
COPY DENSITY CORRECTION signal
CHANGE SOLENOID DRIVE command
DISCHARGE BIAS CHARGE command
LENS HOME POSITION DETECTION signal
LIGHT INTENSITY signal
LENS MOTOR PULSE command A/A*
LENS MOTOR PULSE command B/B*
LENS MOTOR DRIVE command A
DECK PICK-UP ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command
DECK VERTICAL PATH ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 3 CLUTCH DRIVE command
DECK LIFTER CLUTCH DRIVE command
CASSETTE2 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
DUPLE XING UNIT HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command
VERTICAL PATH ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command
CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command A/A*
CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command B/B*
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION / DELIVERY/ DUPLEX MOTOR COMMON A signal
HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION / DELIVERY/ DUPLEX MOTOR COMMON B signal
CASSETTE PAPER1 DETECTION signal
CASSETTE PAPER2 DETECTION signal
CASSETTE RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION command
CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION2 command
CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION3 command
CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION4 command
CASSETTE4 PAPER DETECTION signal
LENS MOTOR DRIVE command B
PEDESTAL MOTOR ERROR signal
MFPD
MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal
MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
MULTIFEEDER PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
MULTIFEEDER SOLENOID DRIVE command
MAIN MOTOR SPEED STATUS signal
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signal
CL7D
MFPUCLD
MFPWD
MFSLD
MLOCK
MMD
MMCLK
MPWN
PCLSLD
PCTRLS
PCURS
PDCS
CMA/CMA*
CMB/CMB*
COMA
COMB
CPD1
CPD2
CRDOP
CS
CS2
CS3
MAIN MOTOR CLOCK signal
MAIN PULSE command
PRIMARY CORONA ROLLER CLEANING SOLENOID command
PRIMARY CORONA DETECT PULSE command
PRIMARY CORONA CURRENT BUFFER signal
PRIMARY CORONA DETECT command
PEDESTAL MOTOR DRIVE command
PRE-EXPOSURE LAMP LIT command
CASSETTE1 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
CS4
CS4PD
CSZ1
PEDMD
PEXD
PUCLD1
CASSETTE SIZE signal 1
CASSETTE SIZE signal 2
CSZ2
A–2
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PWSW
RDOP
RGCLD
RGHP
RPD
SCA/A*
SCB/B*
SCHP
SELECT
SIZE1
SIZE2
SIZE3
SIZE4
SL6D
POWER SWITCH command
RIGHT DOOR OPEN signal
REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE command
DUPLEXING UNIT REGISTRATION ROLLER HOME POSITION DETECTION signal
REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command A/A*
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command B/B*
SCANNER HOME POSITION DETECTION signal
CASSETTE4/5 SELECT signal
ORIGINAL SIZE1 DETECTION signal
ORIGINAL SIZE2 DETECTION signal
ORIGINAL SIZE3 DETECTION signal
ORIGINAL SIZE4 DETECTION signal
DUPLEXING UNIT CHANGE SOLENOID DRIVE signal
DUPLEXING UNIT FLAPPER SOLENOID DRIVE signal
PAPER DEFLECTING PLATE SOLENOID DRIVE signal
SEPARATION DETECTION signal
SL7D
SL8D
SPD
SRSW
TCNTD
TEP
SERVICE MODE SWITCH signal
TOTAL COUNTER DRIVE command
TONER EMPTY signal
TFWON
TFWPWN
TFWS
TH1
TRANSFER BIAS ON/OFF command
TRANSFER BIAS LOW VOLTAGE signal
TRANSFER BIAS PULSE command
FIXING HEATER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
FIXING HEATER END TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
TRANSFER REVERSE ON command
TRANSFER CHARGING ROLLER RELEASING signal
VERTICAL PATH1 PAPER DETECTION signal
VERTICAL PATH2 PAPER DETECTION signal
TH2
TREVON
TRSLD
VP1P
VP2P
3. Abbreviations
AER
AE ROTATION
INTR
LSTR
SCFW
SCRV
STBY
INITIAL ROTATION
LAST ROTATION
SCANNER FORWARD
SCANNER REVERSE
STANDBY
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
not available
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
VCC
R301
ZERCRSS
PI[0..7]
DC Controller (1/14)
LINK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
XR331.SCH
XR332.SCH
XR333.SCH
XR334.SCH
XR335.SCH
XR336.SCH
XR337.SCH
XR338.SCH
XR339.SCH
XR3310.SCH
XR3311.SCH
XR3312.SCH
XR3313.SCH
+
CSGA
CSIPC
CSRAM
CSROM
C391
C392
PI[0..7]
C301
C353
TP[2..15]
TP[2..15]
VCC
VCC
VCC
L1
L2
INDUCTOR
C311
C302
L3
INDUCTOR
VCC
R303
C303
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
84
R304
R302
VCC
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
VSS
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
RES0
TXD0
TXD1
RXD0
RXD1
IRQ4
IRQ5
VSS
D0
AVCC
MD2
MD1
TP8
TP9
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
C304
C305
MD0
CP-SOUT
DTC114EU
Q303
LWR/LW/LCAS
HWR/UW/UCAS
RD/CAS/WE
AS
WR
RD
R305
X301
VCC
XTAL
EXTAL
VSS
NMI
RES
STBY
FAI
BACK
BREQ
WAIT
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
DIPD-I
R306
DEPD-I
R307
VCC
UP-FEDDT-I
LW-FEDDT-I
COVDT-I
WATDG
PH8
VCC
RES
Q301
C306
DERS-I
R349
R308
R309
R310
R311
R312
R313
R314
R315
ADD19
ADD18
ADD17
ADD16
ADD15
ADD14
ADD13
ADD12
R348
VCC
CP-SIN
C310
SCI
R316
D1
A11
VCC
VCC
VCC
C307
DTA114EU
Q302
R317
CP-SCLK
DTC114EU
Q304
R318
CLCK
ADD[1..15]
ADD[0..14]
ADD[1..18]
ADD[0..7]
GA
R347
RAM
ROM
IPC
SCI
C309
VCC
IPC
DATA[8..15]
VCC
L4
INDUCTOR
C308
RAM
ROM
GA
DATA[8..15]
DATA[0..15]
DATA[8..15]
VCC
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (2/14)
VCC
ADD[1..18]
VCC
R355
R401
C314
Q307
1
VPP
VCC 40
R402
Q306
ADD18
ADD17
ADD16
ADD15
ADD14
ADD13
ADD12
ADD11
ADD10
ADD9
ADD8
ADD7
ADD6
ADD5
ADD4
ADD3
ADD2
ADD1
39 A17
38 A16
37 A15
36 A14
35 A13
34 A12
33 A11
32 A10
RES
DATA15
DATA14
DATA13
DATA12
DATA11
DATA10
DATA9
DATA8
DATA7
DATA6
DATA5
DATA4
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8 10
D7 12
D6 13
D5 14
D4 15
D3 16
D2 17
D1 18
D0 19
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MR
Q305
RES
VCC
R354
WATDG
Q398
31 A9
29 A8
28 A7
27 A6
26 A5
25 A4
24 A3
23 A2
22 A1
21 A0
DATA[0..15]
Q399
VCC
R356
DATA[0..15]
2
CE
CSROM
20 DE
11 VSS
VSS 30
VCC
ADD[0..14]
R357
D301
Q309
Q310
RES
Q308
ADD14
1
A14
26 A13
A12
VDD 28
ADD13
ADD12
ADD11
ADD10
ADD9
ADD8
ADD7
ADD6
ADD5
ADD4
ADD3
ADD2
ADD1
ADD0
2
23 A11
21 A10
24 A9
25 A8
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1/07 19
1/06 18
1/05 17
1/04 16
1/03 15
1/02 13
1/01 12
1/00 11
DATA15
DATA14
DATA13
DATA12
DATA11
DATA10
DATA9
D302
R358
C313
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
C315
BAT301
DATA8
Q300
10 A0
1
2
CSRAMOU
4
20 CE
22 DE
27 R/W
RD
VSS 14
RAMWR
DATA[8..15]
RES
A–8
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (3/14)
VCC
L5
DATA[8..15]
INDUCTOR
C316
VCC
ADD[0..7]
ADD[0..7]
R360
WR
RD
CSIPC
PD[0..7]
PD[0..7]
VCC
R361
DATA9
DATA8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
ADD7
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
PE0
PE1
PE2
PE3
PE4
PE5
PE6
PE7
PH0
DO1
DO0
W
R
S
A7
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PB6
PB7
PO0
R362
R368
R374
R363
R367
R375
PE[0..7]
PE[0..7]
AST-RXD
C317
C318
C319
BM
VCC
INTR
RXD3
TXD3
RXD2
TXD2
RXD1
TXD1
CTS3
CTS2
CTS1
CLK
PI2
Q311
PH[0..7]
PH[0..7]
R364
Q312F
Q312E
Q312D
AST-TXD
S-RXD
S-TXD
Q313
R365
R372
R377
12
10
8
13
11
9
VCC
R366
R371
R378
R369
VCC
C379
RES
C320
R370
Q314
X302
C321
C322
VCC
R373
D-RXD
VCC
R376
Q315
D-TXD
VCC
C323
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R383
DC Controller (4/14)
RES
PT40
C324
VCC
C328
PT[60..67]
PT[60..67]
VCC
VCC
PT41
P[30..37]
PT[0..7]
P[30..37]
PT[0..7]
PT57
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
VSS
VDD
PT56
PT55
PT54
PT53
PT52
VSS
PT51
PT50
PT27
PT26
PT25
PT24
PT23
PT22
PT21
PT20
VDD
PT17
PT16
PT15
PT14
PT13
PT12
PT11
VCC
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
PT56
PT55
PT54
PT53
PT52
PT37
PT36
PT35
PT34
PT33
PT32
PT31
PT30
VSS
PTO7
PTO6
PTO5
PTO4
PTO3
PTO2
PTO1
PTO0
VDD
PC15
PC14
PC13
PC12
PC11
PC10
PC9
PC[0..12]
PC[0..12]
PT51
PT50
PT27
PT26
PT25
PT24
PT23
PT22
PT21
PT20
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
PT7
PT6
PT5
PT4
PT3
PT2
PT1
PT0
VCC
VCC
Q316
PT17
PT16
PT15
PT14
PT13
PT12
PT11
PT10
MO
C327
C329
PC12
PC11
PC10
PC9
PC8
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
PT10
RLOFOU
VSS
PC8
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
HTOFFOUT
HTNG
HTOFOU
HTOFIN
ACCRIN
ADD15
ADD14
ADD13
ADD12
VSS
ADD15
ADD14
ADD13
ADD12
74
73
PC0
VDD
VCC
VCC
C330
L7
INDUCTOR
OPTPHA
OPTPHB
OPTENB
VCC
C325
R384
ADD[11..15]
DATA[8..15]
ADD[11..15]
CSRAMOU
DATA[8..15]
RAMWR
VCC
VCC
L6
INDUCTOR
C326
R382
CSGA
VCC
R380
CSRAM
CLCK
WR
RD
A–10
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (5/14)
DUPLEX-COMA
DUPLEX-COMB
DUPLEX-A
+24VF2
+24VF1
VBG
+34V
+
C394
C393
F303
JUMPER
R409
R410
R411
R412
R386
TP8
Q334
R387
C387
D303
C388
Q323
+
VCC
C331
C332
TP7
Q322
VBG
DUPLEX-A
DUPLEX-B
DUPLEX-B
GND34
TP9
Q335
PT21
Q324
VBG
R388 R389 R390 R391 R392 R393
Q325
TP7
D304
D305
D306
D307
TP10
Q336
VCC
SC-A
SC-A
SC-B
SC-B
PT55
VBG
C333
TP4
TP5
TP6
PT57
MO
TP11
Q337
R394
VBG
D308
D309
D310
D311
C334
R350
R351
Q351
LENS-COMA
LENS-COMB
LENS-A
R396
Q350
R395
+34V
GND34
+24V2
R397
R398
R399
R400
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
Q318
R352
R426
GND34
LENS-A
LENS-B
LENS-B
R427
R428
Q319
PT56
Q400
GND34
GND34
Q320
+24VF2
VBG
GND34
+
C390
C389
Q321
GND34
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+24V2
DC Controller (6/14)
+24V2
VCC
D315
PT23
OPCNTD
VCC
R416
Q344
ZD303
Q345
OPCNTPR
R415
Q346
R417
ZD302
1
3
2
4
6
7
5
16
SLNOID
MF PUCL
PT10
PT20
PT12
PT16
VBG
Q338A
PE4
Q347
VBG
+24V2
14
DSR-CL
Q338C
MTR-COM
ZD304
OPTENB
Q352
15
RGCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
Q338B
PE5
CL1
Q401A
VBG
13
LWPU-CL
Q338D
15
PE6
OPTPHA
OPTPHB
PE3
CL2
CL3
CL4
CCD
FL-S
Q401B
11
+24V2
Q338F
VCC
14
D313
Q401C
PT22
TCNTD
10
R413
Q341
Q338G
Q342
TCNTRPR
Q343
R414
13
ZD301
Q401D
12
VBG
Q338E
12
Q401E
11
PAPFAN
TP2
Q401F
R418
PD3
Q339
VBG
10
Q401G
APGND
R419
Q340
PD7
C397
A–12
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (7/14)
VCC
2
4
5
3
6
7
1
15
CHNG-SL
TRCLSL
PT51
PT27
PT17
Q348B
PT13
Q353
PR-EXP
R425
13
MMD
R420
R385
R591
Q348D
PT25
PT54
PT52
Q359
AST-CNTP
12
MFMRLSL
VBG
Q348E
PE2
PE1
PE0
Q356
EPD-SL
14
Q348C
Q327
CP-DATA0
11
PD2
PD1
Q360
Q348F
VBG
CRCLSL
10
Q348G
ZD305
CP-REQ
+24V2
Q405
16
Q357
PT50
Q348A
VBG
VBG
EXFAN
R421
PT24
Q361
ZD306
VCC
+24V2
VBG
PD6
PD5
PD4
R575
R575
Q362
Q363
Q364
1
3
16
R422
BLNKST-SL
PUCL
PT26
VBG
PT11
CSCEP
Q349A
14
R423
5
12
Q349E
PD0
Q349C
EEP-SCLK
EEP-SO
4
2
6
7
13
UPFED-CL
PT15
R424
Q349D
DPT-FAN
15
Q349B
R381
PE7
Q402
11
Q349F
VBG
10
Q349G
SOL-OIL
R403
PT40
Q330
VBG
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (8/14)
VCC
2
4
5
3
6
7
1
15
CHNG-SL
TRCLSL
PT51
PT27
PT17
Q348B
PT13
Q353
PR-EXP
EPD-SL
CRCLSL
R425
13
MMD
R420
R385
R591
Q348D
PT25
PT54
PT52
Q359
AST-CNTP
12
MFMRLSL
VBG
Q348E
PE2
PE1
PE0
Q356
14
Q348C
Q327
CP-DATA0
11
PD2
PD1
Q360
Q348F
VBG
10
Q348G
ZD305
CP-REQ
+24V2
Q405
16
Q357
PT50
Q348A
VBG
VBG
EXFAN
R421
PT24
Q361
ZD306
VCC
+24V2
VBG
PD6
PD5
PD4
R575
R575
Q362
Q363
Q364
1
3
16
R422
BLNKST-SL
PUCL
PT26
VBG
PT11
CSCEP
Q349A
14
R423
R424
5
12
Q349E
PD0
Q349C
EEP-SCLK
EEP-SO
4
2
6
7
13
UPFED-CL
PT15
Q349D
DPT-FAN
15
Q349B
R381
PE7
Q402
11
Q349F
VBG
10
Q349G
SOL-OIL
R403
PT40
Q330
VBG
A–14
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (9/14)
PC[0..12]
VCC
R487
R489
R491
R493
PH0
PH1
PH2
PH3
PH4
PH5
PH6
RGPD
PAP-EX
LENS-HP
BLNKST-HP
L-CHECK
R540
R539
R538
R537
R536
R535
R534
R533
R532
R531
R530
R529
R589
R488
PC0
PC1
PC2
PC3
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
PC8
PC9
PC10
PC11
PC12
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
R490
R492
CP-ACK
HTON
R484
C338 C339 C340 C341 C342 C343 C344
Q384
DTC114EU
VCC
A-TH
M-TH
PI0
PI1
PI2
PI3
PI4
PI5
PI6
PI7
R498
MAIN-TH
AUX-TH
AE-DATA0
R404
R505
R500
R502
R504
C364 C365 C366 C367 C368 C369 C370 C371 C372 C373 C374 C375 C300
MFPWD
KVR
TNEMP
PI[0..7]
C345
C346
C347
C348
C350
C352
VCC
VCC
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
R586
KR0
R528
R587
VCC
KR1
COVDT-I
COVDT
Q312B
R527
4
3
KR2
KR3
KR4
SCI
SC-HP
EEP-SI
C395
R506
Q312C
Q312A
6
5
2
1
Q385
DTC114EU
ZERCRSS
R526
AC-MNTR
PH8
C312
C363
R525
VCC
M[0..12]
M[0..12]
R517
R518
R519
DIPD-I
DEPD-I
DERS-I
DIPD
DEPD
DERS
R521
R523
UP-FEDDT-I
LW-FEDDT-I
UP-FEDDT
LW-FEDDT
C356
C358
C360
C361
C362
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (10/14)
PT[0..7]
VCC
PT[0..7]
Q381H
Q381G
Q381F
Q381E
Q381D
Q381C
Q381B
Q381A
P[30..37]
P[30..37]
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
SEG0
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
DG0
DG1
DG2
Q373
PT0
PT1
KS0
KS1
KS2
Q365
Q381
Q374
VCC
Q366
C337
R592
R594
R596
R582
Q375
PT2
PT3
PT4
Q367
Q368
Q369
DG3
R593
Q376
Q377
KS3
KS4
DG4
D321
R595
FAC0
C386
R598
DG5
KS5
D322
D323
D324
R597
Q378
PT5
PT6
PT7
FAC1
FAC2
FAC3
Q370
Q371
Q372
C398
DG6
DG7
KS6
Q379
Q382E
Q382D
Q382C
Q382B
Q382A
P[60..67]
PT67
PT66
PT65
PT64
PT63
PT62
PT61
PT60
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
8
14
15
16
17
18
SEG8
KS7
Q380
SEG9
Q382
SEG10
SEG11
SEG12
SEG13
SEG14
SEG15
VCC
C335
TD62380P
Q382F
13
Q382G
Q382H
12
11
TD62380P
A–16
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (11/14)
KS0
M6
SIZE1
SIZE2
SIZE3
SIZE4
CNCT1
CNCT2
M7
R450
R451
R452
R454
R455
R456
M8
D325
D327
D329
D331
M6
M7
M8
PAPER1
FEED1
M9
D326
D330
M10
M11
MTRLOK
M10
M11
M12
TCNTRPR
APS-L1
CPDL
D316
KS6
KS1
R469
R470
R471
R472
R473
R474
R457
R458
R459
R460
R462
R463
D352
D354
D356
M6
D332
D334
OPCNTCN1
OPCNTCN2
DIST1
D353
D355
D357
M6
M7
M8
M9
UPLIMIT
FEED2
DROPN
SRSW
M7
D333
D335
D337
M8
M9
DIST2
M10
M11
DIST3
D317
RDROPN
M11
M12
APS-L2
D338
OPCNTPR
KS2
R465
R466
KS7
D339
D341
M6
M7
M8
M9
UPCSZ-1
UPCSZ-2
UPCSZ-3
UPCSZ-4
D340
D342
D344
R475
R477
R478
R479
R359
D358
D360
D362
D320
M6
MFPD
M8
PCBCH
SPD
D361
D363
D318
M9
M11
M12
APS-L3
CPDU
D345
M10
M11
M12
CCDT
MMLOCK
FACTORY
KS3
R467
R468
D346
D348
D350
M6
LWCSZ-1
LWCSZ-2
LWCSZ-3
LWCSZ-4
D347
D349
D351
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
D319
APS-L4
JPPGP
PGP
M[6..12]
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (12/14)
VCC
M-TH
VCC
HTNG
HTNG
C351
VCC
R439
R440
R407
R429
RES
R556
5
6
Q386B
+
–
7
R567
6
5
HEAT-PROT
Q329B
R408
R431
–
+
7
6
5
R557
D312
Q331B
R406
–
+
7
+24V2
D364
M-TH
PT41
Q389
Q354
C377
VCC
VCC
R553
R430
D328
5
6
R555
Q328B
7
+
–
R453
HTNG
3
2
HTNG
Q386A
1
+
–
C354
R433
R436
D336
R554
HTOFFOUT
2
3
Q331A
–
+
R435
R434
1
2
3
VCC
Q329A
1
D314
R432
–
+
A-TH
D368
Q326
+24V2
+24V2
R438
R437
L-CHECK
R571
R574
D366
D367
R503
R573
LAMP-ON
PT14
VCC
LAMP-CHECK
Q392
Q394
+
VCC
C385
R507
C336
C384
C376
R570
R568
R566
Q395
MMLOCK
Q391
JP1
MMLOCK
R569
PT53
HTTRIG
Q393
+24V2
+24V2
+24V2
R572
C378
R559
AE-REF
Q317
VCC
C381
Q390
3
2
+24V2
Q387A
1
+
–
R561
R562
C349
C379
R560
5
6
Q387B
7
+
–
R564
R405
2
AE-DATA0
Q328A
1
SW303
–
+
AE-DATA
1
2
4
3
HTNG
OPCNTCN2
OPCNTCN1
3
R565
SW DIP-2
R563
C380
A-TH
A–18
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (13/14)
MOLEX 53258-0620
J301
VCC
+
24VFI
1
2
3
4
5
6
J307
VCC
1
+
HEAT-PROT
TNEMP
2
3
34V
J310
LAMP-CHECK
CP-REQ
FL-S
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
APGND
VCC
APS-L4
APGND
VCC
APS-L3
APGND
VCC
APS-L2
APGND
VCC
LENS-HP
GND
GND34
GND
VBG
MR
+
24V2
CP-DATA0
CP-ACK
CP-SIN
CP-SOUT
CP-SCLK
AC-MNTR
GND
OPT-FAN
VBG
AE-REF
AE-DATA
+
24V2
9
J302
GND
COVDT
VCC
10
11
12
SC-B
SC-B
SC-A
SC-A
1
2
3
4
5
APS-L1
J303
+24VF1
+24VF1
VBG
1
2
3
4
J308
J311
KS4
FEED1
CL1
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND
KS5
MTRLOK
SLNOID
KS4
/MTR-COM
CL4
CL3
CNCT2
SIZE4
VBG
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
VBG
24V2
GND
AST-RXD
AST-TXD
AST-CNTP
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+
PAPER1
CNCT1
DROPN
FEED2
CL2
UPLIMIT
SIZE1
SIZE2
9
10
11
GND
J304
1
2
3
4
5
6
SIZE3
+24VF1
VBG
+34V
GND34
VCC
VCC
J312
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
24V2
DSR-CL
24V2
J305
+
J309
MFPUCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
VCC
VCC
VCC
DG7
DG6
DG5
DG4
DG3
DG2
DG1
DG0
SEG15
SEG14
SRG13
R580
SEG0
SEG1
SRG2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
SEG8
SEG9
SEG10
SEG11
SRG12
+
24V2
MF MRLSL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+
PUCL
24V2
GND
CPDL
GND
LW-FEDDT
VCC
+
24V2
LWPU-CL
+
RGCL
MMLOCK
MMD
GND
VCC
24V2
UPFED-CL
+
24V2
R581
R583
9
GND
CPDU
10
11
12
13
14
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GND
RDROPN
GND
PAP-EX
J306
KR0
1
KR1
2
KR2
3
KR3
4
KR4
5
SRSW
VCC
KVR
GND
GND
VCC
CCDT
CCD
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DC Controller (14/14)
F302
J318
J324
+
+
24V2
24VF2
KS2
1
UPCSZ-1
UPCSZ-2
UPCSZ-3
UPCSZ-4
GND
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MAIN-TH
GND
24V2
SOL-OIL
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
CHNG-SL
+
24V2
LENS-COMB
LENS-B
LENS-B
LENS-COMA
LENS-A
+
J351
KS3
AUX-TH
CRCLSL
DIST1
DIST2
DIST3
GND
1
2
3
4
5
LWCSZ-1
LWCSZ-2
LWCSZ-3
LWCSZ-4
GND
J313
+
24V2
LENS-A
1
2
3
4
D-TXD
GND
D-RXD
GND
10
11
12
GND
J314
1
VCC
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CSEEP
EEP-SCLK
EEP-SI
EEP-SO
GND
24V2
PAPFAN
VCC
J319
1
2
3
4
5
HTON
GND
HTTRIG
VCC
J325
1
2
3
GND
DEPD
VCC
+
J352
FAC0
FAC1
FAC2
FAC3
FACTORY
PCBCH
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
DERS
GND
VCC
PU-FEDDT
GND
J320
1
2
3
4
5
VCC
DIPD
GND
24V2
EPD-SL
J326
+
DUPLEX-COMA
DUPLEX-COMB
DUPLEX-A
DUPLEX-A
DUPLEX-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
J315
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
+
24V2
DUPLEX-B
TCNTD
+
24V2
GND
BLNKST-HP
VCC
J353
OPCNTD
GND
1
2
3
4
5
VCC
+
SC-HP
VCC
24V2
34V
BLNKST-SL
+
+
24V2
J321
+
24V2
GND
PR-EXP
+
+
24VF2
24VF2
1
2
3
4
EXFAN
24V2
+
VBG
VBG
J316
VCC
1
2
3
TRCLSL
+24V2
SPD
R585
R584
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GND
J322
VCC
MFPWD
GND
MFPD
GND
+
1
2
3
4
24VF2
24VF2
+
VBG
VBG
VCC
RGPD
GND
J317
1
2
3
4
S-TXD
GND
S-RXD
GND
A–20
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Composite Power Supply PCB (1/6)
6
+30VSEC
7
8
+BATT
15
+24VSEC
11
18
17
D84
R1
D1
VCC-PRIN
-BATT
R2
9
Q1
D2
D3
R3
T1
L1
4
3
2
C1
R4
+
+
+ C4
C5
C6
C2
RV1
C7
9
8
C3
HOT
D4
1
R5
C8
C9
F1
F2
F3
D5
Q2
R8
D85
D7
R7
2
4
5
R9
C11
1
C12
T2
U1
R10
R11
R12
5
4
3
2
1
-BATT
C13
VAUX
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
VFEEBBK
R207
COMP VREF
VFS
IS
2
1
VI
OUT
GNS
Q5
J1
OSC
R14
D6
C10
1
2
1
2
R19
WHITE
W4
W15
W1
W3
W2
+
1
2
3
C136
C16
C18
C141
C135
C15
C17
D8
R15
D77
BLACK
D90
C14
R17
Q6
R224
HOT
+
3
2
1
VREF-U1
OSC-U1
W5
W6
D86
VAUX
D9
L2
D10
VCC-PRIN
COLD-LINE
HOT-LINE
D87
+
D11
+
R220
C20
C19
Q52
D88
24V
R21 R20
4
5
-BATT
Q51
D12
D89
R222
K1
ZD11
Q53
R221
Q54
R22
+
Q7
HEAT-PROT
OVERC
R223
C140
R46
R23
-BATT
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–21
1/6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Composite Power Supply PCB (2/6)
36V
R24
24V
R27
R28
C22
R29
R25
R31
R26
R32
+
C23
D14
C24
+
24V
7
3
1
C25
C26
+
-
+30VSEC
1
L3
6
D13
U2A
5
6
2
3
C27
R30
C28
R40
R41
R42
11
10
14
15
R45 C36
5
1
VFEEDBK
-BATT
24V
4
6
2
3
C29
R33
R34
1
U3
3
1
U4
+24VSEC
C139
R36
R37
D15
R47
R38
R43
R39
R44
R35
C33
+
C30
C31
5
4
+
D16
+
-
2
C34
U2D
C32
U2B
11
10
C35
+
-
13
D17
+
5FBT
+
R208
C37
R51
R52
24V
MRES
R209
R49
R50
D18
24V
R48
24V
L4
U6
U5
24V
D19
D20
ZD1
36V
4
3
1
2
OVERC
R53
R54
16
R57
GND
9
8
11
+
-
VS
14
15
5
-BATT
GND
GND
GND
36V
U2C
ZD2
ZD3
R55
6
Q8
19
N.C.
C39
C40
+
+
5FBT
R56
C41
C42
C43
24V
D21
1
C44
R61
R58
C50
2
R60
C48 C45 C46
C47
C49
R210
U20
4
3
1
2
VREF-UI
OSC-UI
R211
24V
R59
R62
Q9
R63
Q10
FAN-ON
Q11
CP-DATAO
D22
A–22
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Composite Power Supply PCB (3/6)
24V
24V
AC+DC BIAS
J2
F4
R64
R65
R66
C51
R67
Q14
C53
Q12
T3
R6
C52
R70
R69
3
4
2
1
AC-BCAS
MRES
+
Q13
V9
H.V.GENERATOR
Q15
C54
L5
R71
MV-L
R72
Q16
D23
C55
ACBIAS-ON
T4
+
5FBT
R73
8
10
2
HV-L
C56
R74
7
6
1
5
R77
HV-H
HV-L
Q17
R75
R76
R78
HV-H
4
+
5FBT
24V
R79
C57
D25
2
2
R80
D27
PRIMARY
R81
R82
Q18
Q19
3
+
-
1
2
J3
R84
R85
U7A
R83
1
2
3
C58
+
5FBT
C59
C60
R88
BIAS-S
R86
D26
C62
+
R89
R90
R87
PDC-S
C64
C61
HV-H
HV-L
R92
D27
R91
C63
C65
R93
24V
R94
R95
Q20
R99
R96
R97
P-CUR-S
PDC-S
+
5
6
+
7
-
P-CTRL-S
C66
C67
C68
R98
C69
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Composite Power Supply PCB (4/6)
DISCHARGE
C71
C72
C70
C73
R100
R101
-
MV L
D30
D31
D28
C74
D29
D32
D33
D34
D35
J4
R102
-
MV H
C75
C76
C77
+
5FBT
R103
R106
Q21
R104
D37
24V
C78
D36
R105
C79
R107
R108
J5
C80
14
13
12
11
10
9
R109
R110
+
5FBT
HEAT-PROT
TNEMPM
LAMP-CHECK
CP-REQM
FL-S
D38
3
+
-
1
2
R111
U8A
MRES
8
J-CTRL
CP-DATAO
CP-ACKM
CP-SIN
7
6
5
HEADER 17
CP-SOUT
CP-SCLK
ZERO-CROSS
4
3
2
1
J-LVL-CTRL
J-CTRL
BIAS-S
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
R113
R114
P-CTRL-S
ACBIAS-ON
P-OUR-S
T-REV-ON
T-FV-ON
T-FV-S
T-CTRL-S
CP-SCLK
CP-SOUT
CP-SIN
24V
J9
R115
24V
4
3
2
1
C81
J-LVL-CTRL
Q22
24V
R116
J8
+
5FBT
5
6
+
-
36V
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
U8B
4
3
2
1
CP-ACKM
CP-BATAO
+
5FBT
J7
R201
Q46
R202
HEADER 17
36V FOR BRUSHLESS MOTOR
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
CP-REOM
J11
1
Q45
FL-LIGHT-ONM
MRES
24V
2
FL-LIGHT-ON
*
+
5FBT
J12
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
R203
FAN-ON
FAN-EN
4
3
2
FAN-EN
1
J10
A–24
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Composite Power Supply PCB (5/6)
-
-
T MAX 6.0KV < 20 UA>
24V
-
-
+
T TYP. 4KV < 6 UA>
C82
D40
C83
+
T CL 3KV < 10 UA>
T Lconst < 10 UA>
T5
-
TRANSFER
R117
-
T FEEDBACK
1
D39
D41
D42
5
6
150M
C86
C87
R118
24V
R119
Q23
24V
T-REV
MV-L
C84
C85
C89
+
D43
5FBT
2
7
D44
D45
+
C88
R120
R121
D46
Q25
Q24
R122
U9
R124
R123
Q26
C90
+
5FBT
7
3
-
T PROTECT
DIS
Q
6
5
D47
C91
THR
CV
R125
2
R126
D48
-
-
TR
T FW ON
R127
R128
Q28
C92
R129
6
5
Q27
-
7
R131
5FBT
Q29
ZD4
+
C93
C94
R130
U10B
24V
+
R133
R132
D50
C95
R135
R134
C97
-
-
T REV ON
C96
2
3
R136
R137
-
R138
R139
1
+
U11A
D51
R141
R140
R142
+
5FBT
C98
6
-
7
5
+
U11B
D52
R143
24V
R144
-
T PROTECT
24V
TRANSFER
R145
R146
R147
R148
R149
Q30
R150
C99
-
-
T FW S
24V
D53
C101
C100
3
2
U12B
+
-
1
R152
5
C102
+
-
7
U10A
6
Q31
24V
U12A
C103
C104
R153
3
+
-
T-CTRL-S
1
R154
C106
-
T FEEDBACK
2
C105
R155
D54
R156
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Composite Power Supply PCB (6/6)
24V
R213
J13
D58
D62
D61
D63
R205
1
2
3
15V
U21
LAMP-
CHECK
4
3
1
2
R158
R159
C107
R171
Q40
ZD6
24VAUX
R157
24V
HOT-LINE
R169
R160
R166
24VAUX
R173
COLD-LINE
D56
D57
R212
R214
R172
R170
U16
Q39
1
5
R219
D55
ZERO-CROSS
Q47
C109
2
3
4
6
L6
Q34
24V
D61
D78
R168
R215
Q32
ZD5
R165
24VAUX
R164
R162
R161
R163
24VAUX
24VAUX
+
U13B
Q48
6
5
R175
U13A
FL-LIGHT-D
Q33
7
3
2
+
-
1
R167
R176
+
R174
C108
U15
R216
BTA12-600C
Q49
1
2
3
6
5
4
15V
D79
R179
R178
C110
R181
R177
C113
R217
C137
ZD7
C136
R218
R182
R184
ZD8
ZD9
D90
24V
C111
1/2V NO FLAME
U14
R204
1
5
2
3
+
4
6
FL-S
R183
C112
A–26
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. CONTROL PANEL KEY PCB
Control Panel Key PCB (1/3)
DG2C
DG1C
DG0C
ILINK
I TAST1.SCH
I TAST2.SCH
J801
DG3C
DG3B
SEG0
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
SEG8
SEG9
SEG10
SEG11
SEG12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
L800
R801
R803
R805
R807
SEG0
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
R802
R804
R806
R808
J802
SEG13
SEG14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DG0
DG1
DG2
DG3
DG4
DG5
DG6
DG7
VCC
VCC
VCC
R809
R811
R813
R815
SEG8
SEG9
S8
R810
R812
R814
J803
S9
KR0
KR1
KR2
KR3
KR4
1
2
3
4
5
SEG10
SEG11
SEG12
SEG13
SEG14
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
DG0B
DG1B
DG2B
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control Panel Key PCB (2/3)
DG4C
DG4B
DG5C
DG5B
DG6C
DG6B
DG7C
DG7B
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S8
S9
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
A–28
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control Panel Key PCB (3/3)
VCC
VCC
R832
R816
Q800
R833
R817
KS0
DG0
VCC
DG0
VCC
Q808
1
2
3
4
5
DG0B
DG0C
D800
SW804
SW803
SW802
SW807
SW806
KS0
KS1
KS2
KS3
KS4
KS5
KS6
R834
R835
R818
Q801
R819
KS1
6
7
8
9
0
DG1
VCC
DG1
VCC
Q809
Q810
Q811
Q812
Q813
Q814
Q815
DG1C
DG1B
DG2B
DG3B
D801
SW805
SW810
SW809
SW808
SW812
R820
R836
R837
Q802
R821
KS2
CLEAR
SW813
STOP
COPY
OK
DG2
VCC
RESET
SW816
DG2
VCC
DG2C
SW814
SW815
SW819
D802
R838
R839
R822
Q803
Q804
Q805
Q806
R823
KS3
AUTO
EXPOSURE
REDUCTION
SW825
ENLARGMENT
SW823
1:1
DARK
DG3
VCC
DG3
VCC
DG3C
D803
SW824
SW826
SW827
R824
R840
R841
R825
R827
R829
R831
KS4
DG4
VCC
LIGHT
TWO-SIDE
SW829
TWO-SIDE-NUM
SW830
INTERRUPT
SW811
SORTER
SW833
DG4
VCC
DG4C
DG4B
DG5B
DG6B
D804
D805
D806
SW828
R842
R843
R826
KS5
ENERGY
SAVING
%
ADD-FUNC
SW834
AMS
TRANSP
SW832
DG5
VCC
DG5
VCC
DG5C
SW817
SW820
SW801
R844
R845
R828
KS6
COMB-NUM
SW813
ZOOM +
SW818
ZOOM -
SW821
CASS-SELEC
SW822
DG6
VCC
DG6
VCC
DG6C
R830
R846
R847
DG7
DG7
Q807
KR0
KR0
KR1
KR2
KR2
KR3
KR3
KR4
KR1
KR4
DG7B
DG7C
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
G. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
+24V
1
J601
R601
R603
+24V
R602
8
4
2
-
R605
1
PD601
2
AEDATA
J601
3
+
C601
Q601
+24V
8
4
6
5
-
7
R604
3
+
J601 AEREF
Q601
C602
4
J601
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
H. INTENSITY SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
D402
D401
+
5V
R402
R403
Q401
J401
R401
+
5V
1
2
1
4
3
2
HTON
GND
4
3
HTON
GND
HTTRIG
J402
1
2
D404
D403
WHITE
W1
J403
Q402
R404
1
2
6
1
HTTRIG
GND
W2
L401 140uH 7A
Q403
C402
AC INPUT CABLE
2
3
4
5
3
FROM
POWER
SUPPLY
R406
R405
C401
BLACK
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
I. TONER LEVEL DETECTION CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
R769
+24V
Q753
R761
R760
R759
+24V
+24V
C757
C756
+24V
Q753
C755
R767
R757
C763
R765
C753
R755
R766
R756
2
1
2
1
+24V
+24V
Q7623
Q7523
Q761
Q751
2
1
2
1
R764
R754
3
3
3
D762
D763
D752
D753
2
1
R771 VR762 R762
D761
R751
R752
D751
C750
+24V
C751
J753
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
J. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2 GENERAL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
J1
I/F Cable -1
J2
J100F J101F
J102F
J216F
3
2
1
Feed
Detector1
PS1
1
5V
GND
2
J217F
3
FEED1
5V
GND
PAPER1
KS4
4
3
2
1
PCB1
OPCST Driver-1
Paper
Detector1
5
PS2
6
7
J110F
8
SIZE1-1
SIZE2-1
SIZE3-1
SIZE4-1
GND
9
J218F
PCB2
10
11
12
6
5
4
3
2
1
Paper Size
Detector1
J115F
J114F
J115FP
J115P
Feed
Clutch1
CL
M
Feed
Motor
CL1
M1
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
K. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-B2 DRIVER
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Driver Circuit Diagram (1/2)
R111
+5V
1
2
3
5V
GND
FEED1
J110
J110
J110
Feed
Detector1
R112
+5V
4
5
6
J110
J110
J110
Paper
Detector 1
GND
PAPER1
7
8
9
10
11
12
KS4
J110
J110
J110
J110
J110
J110
D111
D112
D113
D114
SIZE1-1
SIZE2-1
SIZE3-1
SIZE4-1
GND
Paper Size
Detector 1
1
2
+24V
CLUTCH1
Paper Feed J115
Clutch 1
J115
MTR-B
MTR-A
MTR-COM
to A503
C104
+5V
C103
C102
+34V
C101
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Driver Circuit Diagram (2/2)
Paper Feed Motor
C100
R102
Q102
+34V
C110
C109
C112
C111
R101
C106
R106
+5V
C108 R132
R108
R109 R110
+5V
Q101
R107
R131
C107
R103
R104
Q104
Q103
+5V
+5V
R105
+5V
C105
from A502
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
L. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2 GENERAL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
J1
I/F Cable -2
J2
J2226F
1
2
3
Feed
Detector2
Paper
J100F J101F
J218F
J102F
J103F
PS3
Size
Detector1
KS4
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
SIZE1-1
SIZE2-1
SIZE3-1
SIZE4-1
GND
J2227F
J118F
PCB2
1
2
3
Paper
Detector2
PS4
FEED2
GND
5V
PAPER2
GND
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Paper
Detector1
J228F
J217F
PCB1
5V
GND
OPCST Driver-2
5V
GND
PAPER1
N.C
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
J120
SIZE4-1
SIZE3-1
SIZE2-1
SIZE1-1
KS4
DROPN
GND
5V
8
PS2
J117F
J116F
7
Paper
Size
PCB3
6
Detector2
5
4
Feed
Detector1
3
J216F
2
3
2
1
5V
GND
FEED1
1
2
3
1
J229F
PS1
1
2
3
Right
Door
PS5
Open
Detector
J125F
J114F
J215FP
F215P
J225FP
J225P
Feed
Clutch1
Feed
Clutch2
CL
CL
M
Feed
Motor
CL1
CL2
M1
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
M. CASSETTE FEEDING MODULE-A2 DRIVER
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Driver Circuit Diagram (1/2)
R123
+5V
1
2
3
5V
Right Door
Open
Detector
J120
J120
J120
GND
DROPN
4
5
6
7
8
9
KS5
J120
J120
J120
J120
J120
J120
SIZE1-2
SIZE2-2
SIZE3-2
SIZE4-2
GND
D121
D122
D123
D124
Paper Size
Detector 2
R122
+5V
10
11
12
5V
GND
PAPER2
J120
J120
J120
Paper
Detector 2
R121
+5V
13
14
15
5V
GND
FEED2
J120
J120
J120
Feed
Detector 2
R111
+5V
1
2
3
5V
GND
FEED1
J110
J110
J110
Feed
Detector 1
R112
+5V
4
5
6
5V
GND
PAPER1
J110
J110
J110
Paper
Detector 1
7
8
9
10
11
12
KS4
J110
J110
J110
J110
J110
J110
D111
D112
D113
D114
SIZE1-1
SIZE2-1
SIZE3-1
SIZE4-1
GND
Paper Size
Detector 1
1
2
+24V
CLUTCH1
Paper Feed
Clutch 2
J125
J125
1
2
+24V
CLUTCH2
Paper Feed
Clutch 1
J125
J125
MTR-B
MTR-A
MTR-COM
to A503
C104
+5V
C103
R100
D120
C102
+34V
C101
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Drivcr Circuit Diagram (2/2)
Paper Feed Motor
C100
R102
Q102
+34V
C110
C109
C112
C111
R101
C106
R106
+5V
C108 R132
R108
R109 R110
+5V
Q101
R107
R131
C107
R103
R104
Q104
Q103
+5V
+5V
R105
+5V
C105
from A502
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Cassette 5 size
detection PCB
Cassette 5 paper
detection
Cassette 5 vertical path
detection
Cassette 3 size
detection PCB
Cassette 3 paper
detection
Cassette 3 vertical path
detection
PS7
PS6
PS2
PS1
PCB2
PCB4
Pick-up motor 2
M2
Pick-up motor 1
M1
J238F
J218F
J237F
J236F
J217F
J216F
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
M
M
6
1
5
2
4
3
3
4
2
5
1
6
12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J1
To copier
J234F
J230F
J114F
J110F
10
1
2
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
5VF3
GND
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
GND
7
C5VPD
5VP3
GND
9
C3VPD
C3PUCLD
C3PD
J102F
GND
10
11
12
13
14
C4/5PD
CS4/CS5
CNCT1
CRDOP
C4VPD
J130F
C4SZ1/C5SZ1
C4SZ2/C5SZ2
C4SZ3/C5SZ3
C4SZ4/C5SZ4
GND
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
14
13
12
11
10
9
C4/5PUCLD
C4/5PD
SIZE1
SIZE2
I/F Cable
COM A
SIZE3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cassette pedestal controller PCB
A
SIZE4
A
CNCT2
C5VPD
SELECT3
CS4/CS5
CS3
8
J103F
COM B
7
J134F
B
B
6
5
4
MTR-COM
MTR-A
MTR-B
3
J215P
J225P
J235P
Cassette 3 pick-up clutch
CL1 CL
2
1
2
2
1
1
+24V
C3PUCLD
+24V
GND
+34V
4
6
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
J101F
Cassette 4 pick-up clutch
CL2
1
2
2
1
C4/5PUCLD
+24V
8
J135F
CL
FGND
C4/5PUCLD
J120F
J335P
Cassette 5 pick-up clutch
CL3
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
CL
J2
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
J229F
J227F
J226F
J228F
PCB3
PS5
PS4
PS3
Cassette night
door senson
Cassette 4 size
detection PCB
Cassette 4 paper
detection
Cassette 4 vertical path
detection
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O. CASSETTE FEEDING UNIT-K1
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 (1/3)
+5V
+5V
+5V
R112
R111
R121
R122
R123
R132
R131
+34V
1
+34V
J101
+
2
GND
C101
C102
J101
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C4VPD
CRDOP
CNCT1
C3PD
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
D101
R101
C3PUCLD
C3VPD
GND
GND
+24Çu
+5Çu
+5V
C104
CLUTCH2
CLUTCH3
+
C103
PAPER2
PAPER3
1
MTR-B
MTR-A
MTR-COM
CS3
KS5
KS6
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
2
3
4
5
CS4/CS5
SELECT3
C5VPD
CNCT2
SIZE4
to A503
6
SELECT3
7
8
D102
R102
9
10
11
12
13
14
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
CLUTCH2/3
PAPER2/3
KS5/6
C4/5PD
C4/5PUCLD
MTRCOM
+5V
+5V
+5V
Q103
Q104
Q107
Q117
R103
R104
to A504
A–42
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 (2/3)
+5V
+5V
SELECT3
R106
Q105
Q110
CLUTCH2
R124
CLUTCH2/3
17
3
Q124
19
Q110
2
CLUTCH3
R134
18
Q134
+5V
1
Q125
Q110
PAPER2/3
R125
PAPER2
5
15
19
+5V
Q110
to A502
+5V
20
10
VCC
GND
C110
Q110
4
R135
PAPER3
16
Q135
1
to A502
+5V
Q110
13
KS5/6
7
Q126
KS5
19
+5V
Q110
6
14
Q136
KS6
1
Q110
11
9
N.C.
19
Q110
8
MTR-COM3
to A504
MTR-COM
12
Q137
1
R105
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cassette Feeding Unit-K1 (3/3)
+34V
+5V
R209
R210
R207
R208
R201
Q202
MTR-COM1
R202
MTR-A
MTR-A
MTR-B
MTR-B
to A502
+5V
Q201
R206
1
3
OUTA
COM A
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
TdA
GND
INA
J114
J114
J114
J114
J114
J114
VrefA
INA
4
C206
C209
C211
C210
5
A
6
+5V
7
VSA
RSA
OUTB
TdB
C207
R231
8
OUTA
RSB
VSB
9
A
10
12
14
16
18
11
13
15
17
R205
R232
COM B
VrefB
INB
GND
INB
C205
C212
+34V
C208
B
B
OUTB
+5V
R309
R310
R307
R308
R301
Q302
to A503
MTR-COM3
R302
+5V
Q301
R306
1
3
OUTA
VrefA
INA
COM A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
TdA
GND
INA
J134
J134
J134
J134
J134
J134
J134
4
C306
C309
C311
C310
C312
5
A
6
+5V
7
VSA
RSA
OUTB
TdB
C307
R331
8
OUTA
RSB
VSB
9
A
10
12
14
16
18
R305
C305
11
13
15
17
R332
COM B
VrefB
INB
GND
INB
C308
B
B
OUTB
N.C.
A–44
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
PS1
CL2
Vertical path roller 3
M1
Right door open
sensor
drive clutch
J92F
3
Pedestal motor
PS17
2
1
CL
Deck paper
sensor
J81R
J81P
J81F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
J36F
M
5
1
2
3
J35F
J94F
3
J35R
J35P
PS19
2
3
1
2
2
1
Deck lifter
upper limit
sensor
J222F
J221F
1
2
3
4
1
2
12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
J32F
J32R
J32P
J95F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
PS20
2
1
Deck open
sensor
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
J80R
J80P
J50R
J50P
J50F
J91F
3
To copier
J80F
PS16
1
2
3
3
2
1
GND
DVRPD
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
J111F
J202F
J201F
Deck vertical
path roller
paper sensor
2
1
+5V
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
+24V
GND
DPD
+5V
GND
3
GND
7
J112F
FEED1
CLUTCH1
PAPER1
CNCT1
DROPN
FEED2
9
J93F
3
J102F
GND
DLP
10
11
12
13
14
PS18
2
1
Deck lifter
position
sensor
KS5
J61R
J61P
J61F
GND
DEL
1
2
11
10
9
1
2
CLUTCH2
UPLIMIT
SIZE1
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1
J83R
J83P
+5V
3
3
2
J83F
+24V
CL7D
+24V
CL8D
GND
DEOP
KS5
CL7
4
8
4
1
2
3
SIZE2
Deck pick-up
clutch
5
CL
CL
7
5
4
2
1
Deck Driver
J1 Deck I/F Cable
6
SIZE3
6
6
5
J113F
J84R
J84P
SIZE4
7
5
7
6
J84F
1
8
CNCT2
MTRLOCK
SLNOID
KS5
4
CL8
8
7
2
1
J103F
9
3
9
Deck vertical
path roller drive
clutch
8
2
10
11
2
10
11
9
1
10
11
12
13
14
N.C
KS4
J69R
J69P
MTR-COM
CLUTCH3
CLUTCH4
J90F
3
J69F
SIZE2
SIZE1
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW103
2
1
Deck size
switch PCB
+24V
GND
+34V
4
6
1
2
J114F
CL9D
+24V
J101F
J86R
J86P
J86F
CL9
1
2
2
1
DEPRL
FGND
8
Deck lifter drive
clutch
CL
SL
J2
J87R
J87P
J87F
SL11
1
2
2
1
Deck pick-up
roller release
solenoid
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q. PAPER DECK PEDESTAL-K1 DRIVER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
+5V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
J102
+24Çu
GND
+
C101
C102
+5V
GND
Q120
FEED1
CLUTCH1
PAPER1
CNCT1
DROPN
FEED2
14
7
VCC
GND
C120
1
2
3
+5V
5
+5V
N.C
Q121
+5V
D111
D112
Q121
4
13
12
14
7
VCC
GND
R101
R102
Q121
Q121
C121
6
11
Q103
Q102
Q101
D101
Q106
Q107
D107
Q105
D105
D103
D102
D106
CLUTCH2
UPLIMIT
SIZE1
1
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
J103
2
3
SIZE2
4
+5V
SIZE3
5
SIZE4
6
N.C
N.C
CNCT2
MTRLOCK
SLNOID
KS5
7
R110
8
9
Q110
10
11
12
13
14
KS4
MTR-COM
CLUTCH3
CLUTCH4
+5V
4
+5V
Q120
+5V
+5V
+5V
PR
R104
R103
D114
D113
Q121
2
3
5
6
D
Q
Q
9
8
10
CK
Q120
PR
10
Q111
GND
+34V
1
2
Q112
J101
J101
R105
12
11
9
8
C105
+5V
D
Q
CLR
1
Q109
R109
CK
R111
Q
Q114
C104
+
CLR
C103
Q113
13
Q115
+5V
A–46
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
R. SPECIAL TOOLS
See the table for the special tools used to service the machine in addition to the standard tools set.
Tool No.
Shape
Rank
A
Remarks
No.
1
Tool name
TKN-0093-000
Door switch
actuator
B
A
B
B
For adjusting the
distance between No.
1 and No. 2 mirrors.
2
3
Mirror positioning
tool (comes in
pairs; front, rear)
FY9-3009-040
FY9-3010-000
A
B
For fixing the scanning
cable in place.
Pulley clip
(front, rear)
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
S. SOLVENTS/OILS
Name
Use
Composition
C2 H5 OH
Description
• Flammable.
• Use in a well-ventilated area.
• Avoid breathing concentrated
vapor.
No.
Ethyl alcohol
(Ethanol)
Cleaning:
copyboard glass,
mirror, etc.
1
(CHZ3)2 CHOH
Isopropyl
alcohol
(Isopropanol)
2
MEK
Removing toner or
oil stains
CH3 • CO • C2H5
Methylethyl ketone
• Flammable.
• Use in a well-ventilated area
and avoid breathing concen-
trated vapor.
• Avoid contact with eyes or
skin.
• Do not use for cleaning the
drum, plastic molded parts, or
corona wires.
3
Heat-resistant Lubricating the
Tool No.: CK-0427 (500g can)
(Equivqlent grease may be
used, able to withstand 200°C
for extended periods of time.)
grease
drive mechanisms;
e.g., copyboard
driving gear, fixing
drive gear, fixing
ass’y, etc.
Lubricating oil Lubrication points:
(low viscosity) Scanner rail, etc.
ISO VG 68 oil
Equivalent oil may be used.
Tool No.: CK-0451 (100cc)
4
5
ESSO Febis K68
MOBIL Vactraoil No. 2
SHELL Tonna oil T68
Lubricating oil Lubrication point:
(low viscosity) one-way clutch in
pick-up control
ISO VG 220 oil
ESSO Febis K220
MOBIL Vactraoil No. 4
Equivalent oil may be used.
Tool No.: CK-0524 (100cc).
assembly
Lubricating
grease
Lubrication point:
friction parts
Silicone oil
Silicone oil
Tool No.: CK-0551 (20g)
Tool No.: CK-0438 (100g)
6
7
Conductive
grease
COPYRIGHT
©
1998 CANON INC.
CANON NP6621 REV.0 FEB. 1998 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A–48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (FEB. 1998) (31625)
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi Ibaraki, 302 -0023 Japan
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This publication is printed on
70% reprocessed paper.
PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
0398S1.11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|